JP2020010937A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with an improved presentation effect.SOLUTION: When a super ready-to-win A is to occur, as shown at (C), a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed in an image display device 5 and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a prescribed time is elapsed from a start of the ready-to-win presentation, such as a termination of an introduction portion of the ready-to-win presentation, a title 31AK002 of the super ready-to-win A is displayed across the whole screen of the image display device 5 as shown at (D), and from a speaker 8, a sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted. Thereby, the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title that notifies the type of the reach effect at the start of the reach effect (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2006-101428

  In a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the effect of production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with an enhanced effect.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (eg, a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notifying means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 9D and 9F).
According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 9C).
According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggestion effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a development effect or a notice effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
The suggestion effect execution means includes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, super reach D) as the suggestion effect.
And Super Reach E reach direction)
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying unit may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestion effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above,
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detecting means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIGS. 17E and 18I).
During the valid period of the detection by the detecting means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18 (J) and 18 (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7),
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of the control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (display of the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19A) Display means (for example, an image having the second size reach title image 31AK062 displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 19 (d)) and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size. Further comprising a display device 5 and an effect control CPU 120).
The display means,
Plural types of elements having different aspects (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and (d)) Can be displayed (for example, fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of effect control process processing. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of notice effect determination processing. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine with a gaming machine frame opened. It is an explanatory view showing a display result judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a losing fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern judgment table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 112IW. It is a flowchart which shows a setting confirmation process and a setting change process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating processing executed when power is turned on. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control main processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an initial appearance determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion effect determination table before a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the suggestion effect determination process during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a suggestion effect determination table during a game. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a suggestion effect determination table during a big hit, a character effect determination table, and a light guide plate effect determination table. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure for explaining a specification and a big hit type table in each set value. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of various effects. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a setting suggestion production. It is explanatory drawing which shows a setting suggestion effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting suggestion effect process.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of a special symbol (also called a special figure) as a plurality of kinds of special identification information is provided. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B for performing are provided. These are each composed of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a numeral indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of a special symbol means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed so as to be variable (the same applies to other symbols described later). The fluctuation includes update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the case of the change of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbols described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be referred to as a variable display or a variable display.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as “second special figure game”. In addition, the special symbol display device which performs the variable display of the special symbol may be one type.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. On the image display device 5, various effect images are displayed.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special figure game and the second special figure game, a decorative pattern as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern (a pattern indicating a number or the like). Is variably displayed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down). (Scroll display of direction and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decoration symbol executed synchronously is also simply referred to as a variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. The hold display and the active display are also collectively referred to as a variable display corresponding display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays suspended is also referred to as the number of suspended storages. The number of reserved storages corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storages corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved storage number. In addition, the sum of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, there are provided a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs. Displays the first number of reserved storages, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second number of reserved storages based on the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning port that is always kept in a fixed open state by which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special figure game can be started.

  The variable prize ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting prize port that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in an off state, so that the tip of the movable wing piece is Is in the closed state where the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning prize ball device 6B is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second starting winning opening when the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 is on (second starting). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. It should be noted that the variable winning ball device 6B only needs to change between the closed state and the open state, and is not limited to the one provided with the electric tulip type accessory.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four lower left and right sides of the game area), a general winning opening 10 which is always kept in a fixed open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door that is driven to be opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2). Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the off state, the special winning opening door closes the special winning opening, and the game ball becomes large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is on, the special winning opening door opens the large winning opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special winning opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the special winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10, for example.

  A game ball entering each winning port including the general winning port 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the left side of the game area), a normal symbol display 20 is provided. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 includes a 7-segment LED or the like, and variably displays a normal symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The normal symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9”, a lighting pattern such as “−”, or the like. The normal design may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal symbol is also called a normal symbol game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a pass gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided. Based on the passing of the game ball through the passage gate 41, the general-purpose game is executed.

  Above the ordinary symbol display 20, there is provided an ordinary symbol holding display 25 </ b> C. The general-purpose reservation indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of stored general-purpose reservations, which is the number of general-purpose games for which execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails are provided. At the bottom of the game area, there is provided an out port for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning ports.

  Loudspeakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to fire a game ball toward a game area by a hit ball firing device is provided.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball loaned by a predetermined ball rental machine is held so that it can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device (reservation). ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) from which a prize ball is paid out when the upper plate is full is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by a player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like is provided. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B are provided as detecting means for detecting the operation (operation or the like) of the player, but other detecting means may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
A game ball is fired toward a game area by a rotation operation by a player on a hit ball operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the ordinary symbol game using the ordinary symbol display device 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during a period during the execution of the previous general-purpose game or the like (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but cannot immediately execute the general-purpose game based on the passage). The general-purpose game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary symbol game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "a symbol per ordinary symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol (regular symbol lost symbol) other than the symbol per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol is “regular symbol lost”. When "per day" is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period of time (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  Note that, when the game ball enters (wins) the starting winning opening during a period during which the special figure game is being executed, or during a period in which the game is controlled to the big hitting game state or the small hitting game state, which will be described later. When the special figure game based on the start winning prize cannot be immediately executed), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In the special figure game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, “7”, an actual symbol is different depending on the type of big hit described later) is stopped and displayed as the fixed special symbol, the big hit symbol is obtained. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, “2”) different from the above is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “−”) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, “losing” is obtained.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the state is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is selected from the timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, nine). It is continued until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which a special winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the special winning opening is opened is called a round (round game). In the big hit game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number (15 times or 2 times).

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big winning opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous to the player.

  Note that the "big hit" is set with a big hit type. For example, a plurality of types of opening modes of the special winning opening (the number of rounds and the upper limit period of opening) and a game state after the big hit game state (a normal state, a time saving state, a probable change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared. The type has been set. As the big hit type, a big hit type where many prize balls can be obtained or a big hit type where few or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

  In the small hitting game state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small hitting game state, the opening mode is the same as the big hitting game state in the case of some of the big hit types (the number of opening of the special winning opening is the same as the number of rounds described above, and the closing timing of the special winning opening is also the same). Etc.) to open the big winning opening. In addition, similarly to the big hit type, a small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit game state is ended, the time may be controlled to a time saving state or a certain change state depending on the big hit type.

  In the time saving state, control (time saving control) for shortening the average special figure fluctuation time (the period during which the special figure is fluctuated) is performed as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average time of fluctuating fluctuating time (period of fluctuating fluctuating figure) is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "per-figure hit" in the frug drawing game is improved than in the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that allow the game balls to easily enter the second start winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved, and is therefore an advantageous state for the player.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than that in the normal state is executed. The probable change state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because the change efficiency of the special symbol is improved and the state is likely to be a “big hit”.

  The time saving state and the probable change state continue until one of the end conditions such as the execution of the predetermined number of special figure games and the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. The condition that the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times is an end condition is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a game state other than a special state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time-saving state, a probable change state, or the like. The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special map game will be a "big hit", is set in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed). This is a state in which the same control is performed as when the processing is not executed).

  The state in which the probable change control is being executed is also referred to as a high-probability state, and the state in which the probable change control is not being executed is referred to as a low-probability state. The state in which the time-saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time-saving control is not executed is called a low base state. By combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the probable change state is a high-precision high-base state, and the normal state is also a low-probability low-base state. The high-accuracy low-base state is also referred to as a high-accuracy low-base state.

  After the small hitting game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the control is continued to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs If the special figure game at that time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number cut, the game state is naturally changed). Note that the display result of the special figure game does not have to have “small hit”.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area within a special winning opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to be in a positively changed state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operating the movable body 32, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 as the effect performed in accordance with the progress of the game, the first special figure game or the In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when the display result (also called a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special figure game or the second special figure game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative symbols) which is a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol ) Is also stopped (derived).

  During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end thereof, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for a decorative symbol that has not been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 forms a part of a jackpot combination described below. Is continued.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a ratio (also referred to as a jackpot reliability or a jackpot expectation) in which a display result (a display result of a special figure game or a display result of a variable display of a decorative pattern) becomes a "big hit" according to the effect mode. A plurality of different reach effects are executed. The reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach having a higher hit reliability than the normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a fixed decoration pattern which is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbol (for example, “7”) is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of "probable change big hit" which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit game state ends, odd decoration symbols (for example, "7") are stopped and displayed together, and after the big hit game state ends, the probable change state is set. In the case of a non-probable variable jackpot (normal jackpot) that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as positive variation symbols, and the even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-positive variable symbols (normal symbols). After the reach mode with the non-probable variable design, the promotion effect that finally becomes the “probable variable big hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “small hit”, as a display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, “ 1 35 ”) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols forming the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game is "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state) and when it is "small hit" , A common fixed decorative design may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode does not become the reach mode, and the non-reach combination fixed decorative pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach loss”) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is “non-reach loss”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative design variable display mode becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination other than the jackpot combination (“reach loss”) is displayed as the decorative symbol variable display display result. ) May be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is "reach loss").

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the above-mentioned variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effects include a notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a look-ahead notice effect for giving a notice of the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display with execution suspended). As the prefetch notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Also, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display, one variable display is made to look like a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo continuous production may be executed.

  During the big hit game state, a big hit effect is performed to notify the big hit game state. As the large hit production, a production that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion production that indicates that the value of the big hit game state is improved may be executed. In addition, during the small hitting game state, a small hitting effect for notifying the small hitting game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and in some big hit types (a big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state) By executing a common effect in the state and the state, the player may not be able to know whether the current state is the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hitting game state and after the end of the big hitting gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between the high-accuracy state and the low-accuracy state. You may.

  Further, for example, when a special map game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15 and the like as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of holding), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of holding), Game state, small hitting game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, , A random number circuit 104 and an input / output port (I / O) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns to be described later, effect control commands to be described later, data to be referred to when making various determinations to be described later, and various tables) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as a main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is partially or entirely stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 renewably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first reservation). An output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second reservation display 25B, the general-purpose reservation display 25C, and the like (solenoid driving signal) is provided.

  The switch circuit 110 detects detection signals (game balls pass or exit) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start-up switch (first start-up switch 22A and second start-up switch 22B), count switch 23). (Such as a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on when the vehicle enters) and is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the passing or approach of the game ball has been detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a special winning opening door. Transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game or the like) according to the progress of the game as a part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 The production control command output from the main board 11 is
It is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a big hit type)), and a variation pattern used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later). )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a special winning opening, occurrence of a prize, the number of storages held, a game state), a command for specifying an error occurrence, and the like.

  The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game. (Including various types of notification such as driving of the movable body 32, notification of an error, and notification of restoration of a power failure).

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (this is a process for realizing the above functions of the effect control board 12, and Determination, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected, and a signal appropriately indicating the operation content). In some cases, the control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 displays an effect image on the image display device 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating a sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output a sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and to turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating a lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 has various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs a sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let it.

  The lamp control board 14 includes various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode specified by the lamp signal. I do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the turning on / off of the lamp.

  The sound output, control of turning on / off the lamp (supply of a sound designation signal or a lamp signal, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.) are executed by the effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 includes various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects.
Numerical data indicating is counted updatable. The effect random number may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for inputting an effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11 or the like, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). And an output port.

  Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the voice control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function like the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of the main board 11)
First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, and the like), setting of making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

  Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the power supply is stopped due to the stop of the power supply. In the process at the time of power supply stop, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a process of protecting data in the RAM 102, and the like are performed. The data protection process includes a process of adding an error detection code (check sum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, various timer states, and the like), but also the state of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. RAM1 with backup flag off
If the backup data is not stored in No. 02 (Step S4; No), an initialization process (Step S8) is executed.

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (Step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (Step S4). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply, for example, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state is restored to the state when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbol is being changed, the special symbol change is restarted from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, the effect control command to specify the backed-up game state before the power interruption, or the effect control to specify the display result of the running special figure game if the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the time of restoration from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the restoration from the power interruption has been performed or that the restoration from the power interruption is being performed. Screen display to perform The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

  After transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12 after finishing the restoration process or the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, a loop process is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute a timer interrupt process.

When receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether a detection signal has been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of the jackpot, etc.) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, the start information (start It outputs data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.), probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed, etc.) (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the game random number used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). When the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special figure game, control of the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized. See below).

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process process every time the timer is interrupted, and manages the execution and suspension of the general symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), Opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per day" is enabled. The execution of the ordinary symbol game is performed by driving the ordinary symbol display device 20, and the ordinary symbol reservation display 25C is turned on to display the ordinary symbol reservation number.

  After executing the normal symbol process process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out award balls, and the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes a command control process (Step S27). The CPU 103 may set the transmission of the effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set to be transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as a special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the number of stored holds is executed. When a winning start occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a big hit type) and a fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading a display result or a variation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of storages to be held, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating a determination result such as occurrence of a start winning prize, the number of storages to be held, and pre-reading determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of the winning start-up thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted to

  After executing the start winning determination processing in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processing in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is "big hit" or "small hit", or the big hit type in the case of "big hit" Is determined (prior determination) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a fixed special symbol (any of a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1”, and the special special pattern normal processing ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed prior to the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning the game balls into the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of the winning (also referred to as winning the order).

  When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions made on the main board 11 and various decisions made on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types using a random value for variation pattern determination based on a result of a prior determination as to whether the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. And the like are determined. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  The fluctuation pattern is the execution time of the special figure game (the special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of variable display of the decorative symbol (reach or not, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. (Such as the type of reach effect), and is also referred to as a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol change process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “2”. The special symbol change process includes a process for setting a special symbol to be changed in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to change. And the like. Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol change reaches the special figure change time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol change processing ends.

  The special symbol stop processing in step S113 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop processing, the change of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). The processing for making the setting is included. If the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “losing”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", the game state is updated when the time reduction state or the probable change state is controlled and the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing includes, for example, a process of starting a round in the big hit gaming state and setting a big winning opening to an open state based on the display result being “big hit”. Have been. When opening the special winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed. At this time, an opening upper limit period in which the special winning opening is opened and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set in accordance with, for example, the type of the big hit. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pre-processing ends.

  The big hit opening processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. The processing during the opening of the jackpot is based on the processing of measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the jackpot, and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. For determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing such as stopping supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the opening of the big hit ends.

  The post-big hit release processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". The post-big hit opening process includes a process of determining whether or not the number of times of execution of the round for opening the big winning port has reached a set upper limit number of times, and a process of determining whether the number of times of execution of the round has reached the upper limit number of times. And the like for performing a setting for terminating the process. When the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. On the other hand, when the number of rounds has reached the upper limit number of executions, The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release processing ends.

  The big hit end processing in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The big hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state, and a change in response to the end of the big hit game state. The processing includes various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the big hit end processing ends.

  The small hit release pre-processing of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting the large winning opening to the open state in the small hitting game state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit opening processing in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". The processing during opening of the small hits includes processing for measuring the elapsed time from the opening of the special winning opening and timing for returning the special winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes a process of determining whether or not the event has occurred. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing of ending the small hitting game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening processing ends.

  The small hit end processing in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is performed is performed. Here, when the small hitting game state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hitting gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hitting game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operation of effect control board 12)
Next, main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 The register setting of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit) is performed. Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt is generated due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In the command reception interrupt processing, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interruption permission, and then ends the command reception interruption processing.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control commands are read out. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the effect control command that has been read is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the effect control command received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process processing or the like. For example, it turns on a provided reception flag. When the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the CPU executes the effect control process process (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, a display operation of an effect image in a display area of the image display device 5, a sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative luminous body such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and a movable body 32 The control for operating various effect devices, such as the driving operation of the camera, is performed. Further, with respect to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

Subsequent to the effect control process of step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random number used on the effect control board 12 is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in step S76 in FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process illustrated in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, setting, and the like for executing a look-ahead notice effect are performed based on a start control effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the number of held memories specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the processing of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any one of the following steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. And so on. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the decorative design variable display (fixed decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach Whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are to be executed, the mode thereof, the execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a set of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol, updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, and ends the variable display start setting process. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol according to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The variable display effect processing in step S172 is processing executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5 by instructing the display control unit 123. Driving the movable body 32, outputting a voice or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and transmitting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect controls such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by the output are performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. After performing such an effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating stop display of the fixed decorative symbol from the main board 11 is received. In response to, for example, the fixed decoration symbol which is the display result of the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

The waiting process per special figure in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In the waiting process per special figure, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to “6”. To ". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hitting game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit effect process. Also, when the reception waiting time of the command has elapsed without receiving a command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special map game is “losing”. Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”. When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the wait process per special figure ends.

  The small hit production process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect production process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set contents. . In addition, in the small hit effect production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating the end of the small hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit production process ends.

  The small hit end effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In the small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and performs various effect controls based on the set contents at the end of the small hit game state. Execute Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the small hit end effect process ends.

  The big hit production process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is “6”. In the big hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set contents. In the big hit middle rendering process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating termination of the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the rendering control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending rendering process. 7 ", and ends the big hit production process.

  The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the big hit game state, and performs various effect controls of the ending effect at the end of the big hit game state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of the basic description)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize. However, the game media is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. An enclosed game machine may be used.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and the extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even when the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the sign indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player, If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.).

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form that is distributed and provided to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium. It may be in a form of being distributed by being installed in a storage device included in the storage device. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, programs and data for implementing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  The game can be executed not only by installing a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, the program may be directly executed using hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, one of the expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, and “differentiate”) is that one of the ratios is “0%”. May be included. For example, it may include that one is a ratio of “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a view for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), in the present embodiment, the non-reach-loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1-2 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is "losing". And the display result is "big hit", such as reach-losing variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the display mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". There are prepared the following fluctuation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability (big hit reliability) when each reach is executed is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 8B, normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach B <Super reach A increases in order. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines that it becomes a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. The variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves into a super-reach one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability evolves in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 8B, the title notification mode differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified of the title of the reach only by display, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself, such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. 9 and 10 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect production operation according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 (A) shows that the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” of the image display device 5. . Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 9 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” is stopped and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, a character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and a reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the super-reach effect, such as the end of the super-reach-reach effect (also referred to as the super-reach effect), the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed, and the sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8. , The title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (E), the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, if a friendly character wins, a big hit occurs, and if the friendly character loses, a loss occurs.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Further, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 9E, and may be displayed as subtitles in a lower portion of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the super reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 9 (F), the title 31AK005 of the super reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In this case, the character “SP Reach B” is displayed, and a sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the Reach title name is output from the speaker 8, thereby notifying the Super Reach B title. You. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, and as shown in FIG. 9 (G), the character 31AK006, which is the enemy character, is displayed. The subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed since the super reach effect was started. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, and the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Also, in Super Reach A (FIG. 9 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And Super Reach B (FIG. 9 (C) → (F) → (G). In the introductory portion until the notification, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9C). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach is to be made since the super-reach effect is started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to the completely common production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined by watching the production, for example. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be executed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (here, the character of “SP Reach D”) is displayed in a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9H. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in Super Reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title name as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the expectation degree of the reach even during the reach effect. Although FIG. 9 (I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9 (C) (super reach A, super reach B), a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 9 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach effect of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is executed. You.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Thus, the title of Super Reach E is announced. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in the super reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach effect of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach effect, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIGS. 9D, 9F, and 9F). H)). By doing so, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the super reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in a super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach effect, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is notified on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing so, the title notification corresponding to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Also, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method for changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expectation degree suggestion display)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation suggestion display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. The set numerical value may be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars may be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased.

(Title display end timing)
Further, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is deleted and the super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a predetermined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. Further, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. In addition, the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in any case in order to improve the effect.

  Note that, here, the effect of the reach effect of the super reach C is omitted, but for example, a title notification or an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decided production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a determined effect for notifying whether or not the display result is a "big hit" is executed. The determined effect includes a determined effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a determined effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10B, a fixed effect in which the image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and a big hit combination is obtained as shown in FIG. 10D. A fixed decoration symbol is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In this embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced and the variable display is executed at the lower right portion of the image display device 5. The method of displaying the decorative pattern of the item may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, and the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character display which is resident during the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile communication are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the super-reach reach effect so as to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the extended effect is performed while the reach effect of Super Reach D is being executed (the title notification of Super Reach D is being executed), FIG. As shown, an effect is performed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, when the game reaches the super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11C, the title of the super reach A is announced, and the reach effect of the super reach A is executed. In the case of evolving to Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 11D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and a Reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination. As shown in FIG. 11, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, the title notification by display and voice is executed again.

It should be noted that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11B, but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked due to cracks, or a sandstorm (display indicating failure) is displayed. You may do so. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 9H, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured to display a black star indicating the expectation degree from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that indicates a degree of expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12 (A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation indicator 31AK021 of five white stars is first displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK021 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12C, the black star 31AK022 moves and the expectation indicator 31AK021 moves. An effect that fits into one of the white stars is performed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 12D and 12E, the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expected degree suggestion effect has been completed.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, the black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. However, two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation increases by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be raised by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of rising expectation). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. The same black star image is displayed regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, and fits in the white star of the expectation suggestion display, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

FIGS. 12 (G) to 12 (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 12 (A) to 12 (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the state shown in FIG.
), The title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed. At this time, a voice corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a voice different from the normal mode (for example, a voice having a different voice color) is output. In addition, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation indicator 31AK024 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 12 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves to display the expectation indicator 31AK024. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds is performed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound of “pong” indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black diamonds corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 12 (L), the black diamond is highlighted as if it glows. In this way, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 12 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expected degree suggestion production). May be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be made different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, the effect according to the preference of the player can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is indicated by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation indication display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is executed. May be executed in such a manner that the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to, or instead of, the expectation effect effect of the present embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, in the case where the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at once instead of stepwise. For example, as shown in FIG. 13A, after the title of Super Reach D is announced and the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, a button is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An extended effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 13C, the title 31AK032 of super reach C (here, the character of “SP reach C”) is displayed, and The title of Reach C is announced. As described above, when the development effect is executed, the title information of the reach of the development source is switched to the title notification of the reach of the development destination. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 14 (A), the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14B, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed. As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is announced by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) is changed is executed, after the title display mode has been changed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that improves the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of increasing the degree of expectation can be executed, and thus the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute an announcement effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If the pattern is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute a title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, for example, according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title changes from “black”, “red”, “black” to “red”, and changes from “black” to “fruit pattern”. There are also items that change from "red" to "fruit pattern", and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the title display color changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

The “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. For the display color change, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. In addition, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be made different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined in the normal mode at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16A, and the normal mode as shown in FIG. Determine the title display color at different rates. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line, etc.) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 16 (C), the display colors of the lines in the reach effect are changed from “white”, “red”, and “white” to “red”, and in this order (ascending order). The jackpot reliability is high. That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may change after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  In addition, the big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to focus attention on the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialog may be determined at a different rate from the normal mode in the special mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

Note that, instead of the dialogue notice, a notice effect in which the reliability of the big hit is foreseen by a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination result in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination process ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, the title advance notice and the dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of the super reach, but in the case of the specific super reach (for example, other than the super reach with low reliability), the title advance notice is provided. And at least one of dialogue notices may be made executable. In addition, although the title announcement and the speech announcement have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be different depending on, for example, the type of super reach. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between the title notice and the dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and an effect effect in which the image acts on at least one of a title and a line may be executed. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image and the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result regarding the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the rate at which at least one of the title notice and the speech notice changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the effect and the effect of the line notice (the ratio of the effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) the effect changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which one of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of one of a title and a line in accordance with the effect content of the reach effect (for example, an effect of a character or an effect in a battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the contents of the reach effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5 or the like, or may be a movable type or a retractable type. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, after the image display device 5 notifies the title, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the expected degree suggestion display. By doing so, it is possible to display the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display are also easy to understand.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information relating to other effects (notice of mainly displaying characters). You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, etc.) in which the background image and the effect mode are different on the image display device 5, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission ("Let's reach at 7", "Eliminate enemies using a stick controller", etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to title notification of a mission.

(Variation 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, the determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and then the display result is displayed ( (FIG. 10 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is displayed in accordance with the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super-reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 has reached the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, a character 31AK041 as a friend character and a character 31AK042 as an enemy character are displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 18 (G) to (I), a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed.

  With the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 17C, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5. Thereby, the operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. The big hit reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. Further, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 17E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 becomes the large button image 31AK047. Changes to

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (H), a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 18 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and a bullet hits the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 to be displayed is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may be different depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Thereafter, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 18J, and the stick image 31AK051 is enlarged and displayed in the center as shown in FIG. 18K. Is displayed to prompt the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. 18 (M), a fixed decoration symbol which is a big hit combination is derived. If no operation is detected within the predetermined operation validity period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

  In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is performed in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the expectation of the player is improved. Can be maintained.

  Note that, in the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but as appropriate, in parallel with the reach effect and the operation effect shown in FIGS. 17 and 18. It may be executed. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, the effect effect or not, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement of the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image having a high jackpot reliability and displayed with a plurality of types of elements included in the image. The plurality of types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Further, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during the execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a reach title of red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When the shutter display and the reach title display are performed, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and notifies the game effect lamp 9 by emitting light. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. In the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 19D, a super reach effect is started. The variable display is displayed small, for example, at the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed at the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is performed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed, and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect of issuing a specific sound (voice) indicating that the character has high jackpot reliability, such as "hot hot", is executed. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 19 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character "BATTLE WIN!" Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect is over, the display returns to the original variable display screen with the numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 19 (f), all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D, both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. This makes it possible to suitably display the fruit pattern image in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thus, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A is larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D. Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  The shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination regarding the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. In this case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Further, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 15 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

(Explanation about the feature part 112IW)
Next, the characteristic portion 112IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the pachinko gaming machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 112IW001a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and a gaming board constituting a gaming board surface. (Gauge board) 2 and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 112IW003 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined hitting ball firing device and driven into the game area. Further, the game machine frame 112IW003 has a glass door frame 112IW003a having a glass window between a door opening position for opening the front surface of the game machine frame 112IW003 centering on the left side and a door closing position for closing the front surface. The game area is rotatably provided, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 112IW003a. When the glass door frame 112IW003a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

  Further, the gaming machine frame 112IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a clerk or the like of a game arcade into a lock and unlocking it, and players other than the clerk can open the gaming machine frame 112IW003 and the glass door frame. The 112IW003a cannot be opened.

  The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 112IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. The main board 11 has a setting key 112IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state described later, and a setting key for changing a set value such as a jackpot winning probability (ballout rate) described later in the setting change state. A setting changeover switch 112IW052 that functions as a setting switch is provided.

  The setting switch main body provided with an operation unit that can be operated by a player, such as the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052, is housed in the board case 112IW201 together with the main board 11, and the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052. Are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the right rear part of the substrate case 112IW201 so that the operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 112IW201.

  Since the board case 112IW201 having the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is improper when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. Operation is possible by opening the gaming machine frame 112IW003 using a predetermined door key. Further, since the setting key 112IW051 needs to be operated by a setting key owned by a clerk or the like at the game arcade, only the clerk having the setting key can operate the setting key 112IW051. The setting key 112IW051 is also a switch capable of performing an ON / OFF switching operation described later. In the characteristic portion 112IW, the mode in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys has been described as an example, but one key may be shared.

  Further, on the board case 112IW201, a display monitor 112IW029 and a display changeover switch 112IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 112IW029 are arranged. The display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and are arranged at the upper left of the board case 112IW201. That is, the display monitor 112IW029 and the display changeover switch 112IW030 are arranged on the front of the board case 112IW201 when the main board 11 is visually recognized. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting change switch 112IW052 of the present feature section 112IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 may be operated from the inside of the gaming island where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, a board including a setting key 112IW051 and a setting changeover switch 112IW052 is provided at the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. A security cover 112IW500A that covers the right side of the case 112IW201 from the rear side is attached. The security cover 112IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 112IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction, and a long piece 112IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 112IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. , Made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 112IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the board case 112IW201. The security cover 112IW500A is fixed to the right end of the outer frame 112IW001a via the front end of the short piece 112IW500Aa.

  As shown in FIG. 20B, the long piece 112IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right part of the board case 112IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. This covers the right side of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 cannot be operated by the long piece 112IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in a state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened, the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 to move from the long piece 112IW500Ab. By separating, the covered state by the long piece 112IW500Ab is released, and the state becomes operable.

  That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature portion 112IW, when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the operation of the operation section including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is regulated by the security cover 112IW500A. In the state where the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is opened while the state is maintained, the restriction state by the security cover 112IW500A is released, and the operation of the setting key 112IW051 and the setting change switch 112IW052 is permitted. State.

  Since the board case 112IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting key 112IW051 and the setting changeover switch 112IW052 when the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed. The setting value cannot be changed by operating the setting key 112IW051 or the setting changeover switch 112IW052 unless a store clerk or the like at the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 112IW003 with the door key.

  However, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a gaming island (not shown) in a gaming arcade, even if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed, for example, another pachinko gaming machine adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 An illegal member such as a wire or a cell plate enters between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a gaming device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a setting key 112IW051 on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is a possibility that the setting value is changed by operating the setting switch 112IW052 or the setting change switch 112IW052. Therefore, when the game machine frame 112IW003 is closed, the setting key 112IW051 is switched to the setting key 112IW051 by the security cover 112IW500A. Restricted state in which operation on the operation unit including the switch 112IW052 is restricted By being maintained, it is possible to suitably suppress the abuse.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is closed and the right side of the back of the board case 112IW201 including the setting key 112IW051 and the setting switch 112IW052 is covered by the security cover 112IW500A, the security cover 112IW500A having transparency can be used. Since the main board 11 and the like housed in the case 112IW201 can be seen through, the status of the mounting surface on which the electronic components such as the CPU 103 and the like on the main board 11 are mounted and the sealing seal can be easily confirmed.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  In the feature section 112IW, on the side of the main substrate 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the general figure display result determining method Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. It should be noted that other random numbers may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also includes table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display such as a special symbol or a normal symbol. And a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), and FIG. -4 (C), the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), the big hit variation pattern judgment table (not shown), and the loss shown in FIG. 20-6. A variation pattern determination table, a general-purpose display result determination table (not shown), a general-purpose variation pattern determination table (not shown), and the like are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present feature section 112IW has a configuration in which the jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal process of the special symbol process process, the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit is changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to the set value. . The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the lowest payout rate, and the payout rate increases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the lowest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually increases.

(Display result judgment table)
FIGS. 20A to 20C are explanatory diagrams illustrating a display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subjected to the variable display, and the case where the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value of the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at the time of non-probable change, 1/32 at the time of probable change) than when the set value is "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins the jackpot with the same probability (1/320 for non-probable changes and 1/32 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/300 at non-probable change, 1/30 at probable change) than in certain cases. Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designation buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins a jackpot with the same probability (1/300 for non-probable changes and 1/30 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display I do.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability than the case of “2” (1/280 at the time of non-probable change, 1/28 at the time of probable change). Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Wins the jackpot with the same probability (1/280 for non-probable changes and 1/28 for probable changes) when the first special symbol is the subject of variable display. I do.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 20-4 (A) to (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state, but to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  Also, for example, when the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a probable change state (high probability state) and then ends a probable change state based on execution of a predetermined number of times (probability change end times), the same probability change In the case of the number of times of termination, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of continuation of change (ratio of extended holidays) increases in the order of setting value “1” <setting value “2” <setting value “3”.

  Note that, in the present characteristic part 112IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 20A is an explanatory diagram of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Note that, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the case of determining the big hit type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed) A common jackpot type determination table is used for determining the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Although it is configured to be used, a different table may be provided so that the ratio of which jackpot type is determined is different.

  The jackpot type determination table determines the type of the jackpot from the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C based on the random number (MR2) for the jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine one of them.

  In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to the random number (MR2) for the jackpot type determination is assigned for each set value. The ratio of the determined judgment value is shown. That is, the ratio of which one of the jackpot types A to C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that although a loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-7, which will be described later, are actually assigned determination values corresponding to random numbers. In order to simplify, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the set value is “2”, When the ratio determined to the big hit type B is high and the set value is “3”, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio determined to the big hit type A becomes high.

  Here, the big hit type in the main feature portion 112IW will be described with reference to FIG. 20-5 (B). In the main feature portion 112IW, a fan fare period, an interval period, and an ending period in the big hit game are determined for each big hit type. Have been.

  The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big hit opening process of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the start of the big hit game state is started. This is a period in which a fanfare effect as an effect operation to be notified is performed.

  The interval period is, for example, a period in which the post-big-hit opening process of step S116 is executed on the main substrate 11 side, and after the round in which the special winning opening is opened on the effect control substrate 12 side is ended, This is a period in which an interval effect as an effect operation for notifying the start of the round is performed.

  The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big hit end process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the big hit game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is a period to be done.

  As shown in FIG. 20-5 (B), the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are the longest in the case of the big hit type A, the longest in the case of the big hit type B, and the longest in the case of the big hit type C. It is set to be shorter.

As described above, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the ratio of being determined to be the big hit type C is high, so that the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period tend to be relatively long because the ratio of being determined to be the big hit type A is high. Therefore, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The feature section 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit increases in the order of the setting value “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the setting value is “1”. The average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period becomes longer in the order of "<2" <"3". With such a configuration, when the jackpot winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be extended, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and gambling Can be prevented from becoming too high.

  The feature section 112IW is configured to be able to execute a jackpot suggestion effect (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during the jackpot game. The jackpot suggestion effect is performed in a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period. Executable in the period. With such a configuration, interest in the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be enhanced. Further, by directing the player's interest to the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is possible to make it difficult to notice the length of each period.

  In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is commonly executed.

  In addition, in the feature section 112IW, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are set for each big hit type, and the ratio of which big hit type is determined for each set value is different. When the winning probability (ball-out rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. The fanfare period, interval period, and ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the determination values are set such that the ratio of selection of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period in which the relatively long periods are set is high in the order of the big hit types A <B <C. Thus, the average value of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period can be made longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  In this feature section 112IW, in each of the big hit types A to C, the time saving control and the probable change control executed after the end of the big hit game state are performed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present feature section 112IW). The game is terminated when the figure game is executed or the jackpot game state is reached before the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. May be performed. In the case of such a specific big hit type, a big hit game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. The characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the ratio of the jackpot is different for each set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to or in place of such a configuration, the probability change continuation is performed for each set value. The rates (rensole rates) may be different.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 112IW, there is no difference in the advantage (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the time saving control and the probability change control, the number of times of control, etc.) in the jackpot type A to the jackpot type C. Although the average period of the period and the ending period is configured to be different, for example, for each big hit type, the number of rounds during the big hit game, the presence or absence of time saving control and probable change control, the number of times of control are different, and the degree of advantage is different You may do so. In this case, the effect during the round may be different for each big hit type, or may be the same regardless of the big hit type.

  Note that the feature unit 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is determined at a different ratio from the big hit type A, the big hit type B, and the big hit type C according to the set value. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Depending on the set value, one of the jackpot types A, the jackpot type B, and the jackpot type C that cannot be determined is one or more. There may be more than one. In other words, the fact that the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs depending on the set value that has been set means that one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific jackpot type is 100%. Deciding on a percentage is included.

  In addition, in the present characteristic part 112IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period are different depending on the type of the big hit has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending time regardless of the big hit type. You may comprise so that periods may differ. For example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period according to the set value may be determined uniformly. Further, for example, according to which of the set values “1” to “3”, a lottery process is performed with a selection probability according to the set value, and a fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period are determined. May be.

  As described above, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is the big hit varies depending on the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved. .

  In the present feature section 112IW, the jackpot type is determined using the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be made using MR1 which is a random number for determination.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the larger the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous to the player (the larger the jackpot probability, the easier it is to determine the jackpot type C as the jackpot type, etc.). Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be, the more advantageous the player is.

  Further, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the big hit probability changes according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, while the gaming property itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the gaming properties may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is set to a gaming property (a so-called probability variation loop type) in which the probability variation state loops at a rate of 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and a game ball is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. The game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to the certain change state based on the passing of the predetermined count switch, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the count switch during the big hit game differs according to the big hit type. If the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a set value of 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, and the game ball is set during the high base (during the time saving control). Or as a game of controlling the jackpot gaming state based on passing a predetermined count switch provided special variable winning ball device 7 (the so-called one two-kind mixed type). Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as that of 1-3, the big hit probability is higher than the case where these set values are any of 1 to 3, while the big hit game is in progress. (For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4) may be provided.

  Furthermore, when changing the playability according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is used as a game switch (when a game ball is set). It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a certain change state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Variation pattern judgment table)
Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a large hit variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and a variation display result of “loss” A loss variation pattern determination table used when predetermined is determined is prepared in advance.

(Loss variation pattern judgment table)
FIG. 20D is an explanatory diagram of the loss variation pattern determination table. In the characteristic section 112IW, a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a special period) from when the setting change is performed at the time of turning on the power until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times), and other periods ( (Hereinafter, also referred to as a non-special period).

  Specifically, during the special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the first loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and during the non-special period, the fluctuation pattern is determined as shown in FIG. 20-6 (B). The variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. Note that in the present characteristic unit 112IW, the period from the time when the setting is changed at power-on to the time when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times) is a special period, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special period may be a period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether the setting is changed when the power is turned on. In addition, a special period may be set in a predetermined time zone (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am) using a real-time clock or the like. Further, a period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

  In the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), normal reach and super reach lose are set in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The determination value is assigned such that the ratio is high and the ratio of non-reach loss is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of the normal reach and the super reach differs according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the normal reach and the super reach are executed.

  The first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher ratio of normal reach loss than the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between the two becomes large. With such a configuration, the difference in the frequency at which the normal reach is executed becomes easier to recognize in the special period than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the set value), and therefore, the motivation to play the game in the special period Can be given to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

  Note that, for example, the fluctuation pattern with super reach (or a specific fluctuation pattern thereof) is determined at the same ratio regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period). You may make it. By doing so, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (in this example, normal reach loss) differs according to the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency at which the specific variation pattern is executed. become. Conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that causes the super reach loss may be changed according to the set value.

  In addition, the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B are either normal reach loss or super reach loss depending on the set value at the time other than the non-reach loss. The determination values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, normal reach loss: balance of super reach loss) differs. Specifically, in the first loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20A, the ratio of the normal reach loss becomes significantly higher in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” (this example). Specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (B) shows the normal reach loss in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. Is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. Further, the difference in the selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period can be increased.

  In the present feature unit 112IW, setting suggestion effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set value. This is because the execution ratio of the entire normal reach loss and the super reach loss differs according to the set value, and depending on the set value. The concept includes that the execution ratios of the normal reach loss and the super reach loss are different, and that the execution ratios of only the normal reach loss are different depending on the set value.

  The feature unit 112IW displays a common background image on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) is used. Then, the effect symbols are changed and displayed. Further, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner. The dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance amusement of a game during a special period or a period from when the power is turned on to when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the example of the feature portion 112IW. Is selected only during the special period, so that the special variation pattern can be selected only during the special period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a special period, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

(Non-reach loss variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 20C is an explanatory diagram of the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 112IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss fluctuation patterns having different fluctuation times are provided, and when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any of non-reach loss A to C. Is configured. The configuration is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the non-reach loss A to C is included in the loss variation pattern determination table illustrated in FIG. 20-6, and any of the non-reach loss A to C, the normal reach loss, and the super reach loss is performed. May be determined.

  As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table, when the set value is “1”, the ratio determined as non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the set value is “2”. ", The ratio determined as non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and when the set value is" 3 ", the ratio determined as non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is increased. Is assigned a judgment value.

  In the present feature unit 112IW, when the set value is “1”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so that the fluctuation time during non-reach loss is likely to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is “3”, the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so that the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”.

  The present feature section 112IW is configured so that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit increases in the order of “1” <“2” <“3”, but at the same time, the setting value is “1”. "<2" <"3" so that the average fluctuation time becomes longer. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of a big hit (the payout rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling property becomes too high. Can be prevented.

  The characteristic portion 112IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time is different by changing the ratio of any of the non-reach losses A to C having different fluctuation times according to the set value. A plurality of types of variation patterns other than the reach loss (for example, normal reach loss and super reach loss) may be provided so that the variation time is different, and the selection ratio may be different depending on the set value. When a plurality of types of variation patterns (for example, normal reach loss and super reach loss) are provided so that the variation time is different, the time of the swing display or the high-speed variation display of the effect design is made different, and the effect of the effect or the like is changed. It is desirable that there be no difference in appearance.

  In addition, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the average fluctuation time is configured to be different according to the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the fixed effect symbol (final The period in which the stop symbol is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the winning probability of a big hit (the payout rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed effect symbol (final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, to delay the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 112IW, the fluctuation time is set for each of the non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of determining the non-reach loss A to C is different for each set value, so that the big hit is won. When the probability (the payout rate) is set to a high value, the average fluctuation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. However, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern is not limited to such a configuration, but may be set for each set value. May be fixedly set, and the setting in which the jackpot winning probability (yield rate) is higher may cause the fluctuation time to be longer.

  Note that, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, a variation pattern for shortening the variation time is provided compared to other variation patterns. For example, a fluctuation pattern of a shortened non-reach loss (a fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds) having a fluctuation time shorter than the non-reach loss A (a fluctuation time of 9 seconds) is provided. The shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than a predetermined number (for example, 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit or is in a state close to the upper limit, this state is resolved and the fluctuation display is performed efficiently (that is, the game proceeds efficiently). ). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the number of reserved memories is equal to or more than the predetermined number. For this reason, in the feature section 112IW, the fluctuation pattern for shortening used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or more than the predetermined number has a common fluctuation time regardless of the set value. Regardless of the configuration of the feature section 112IW, the variation time for the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number may be varied according to the set value.

(Display monitor 112IW029)
In the feature section 112IW, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of game balls entering each winning port (large winning port, second large winning port, first starting winning port, second starting winning port, general winning port) is determined. The tallying can be performed, and various winning information such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, the base and the like can be calculated.

  Specifically, the display monitor 112IW029 includes a four-digit display unit. The display portion of each digit is composed of seven segments each composed of seven segments drawing the character “8” and dots arranged on the lower right side of the seven segments.

  The display contents are displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and the numerical values are displayed as percentages on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Display No. 5 displays the base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls, and display No. 6 displays the base (base 2) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls. Is done.

  Here, the short term means a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6,000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after starting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio once.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the gaming state, but may be calculated in consideration of the gaming state. For example, the connection ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening in the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the total number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening in the high base state and the number of winning balls due to winning in the large winning opening in the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the first digit display unit and the second digit display unit, and when the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 is displayed, “Y7.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display unit and the fourth digit display unit, and the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. Is displayed, the short-term role ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed. "A7." Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion. When the total cumulative connection ratio of display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion, and the total of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the cumulative total ratio is displayed, the total cumulative ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the first digit display portion and the second digit display portion, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, one digit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the eye display unit and the second digit display unit. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the display unit of the third digit and the display unit of the fourth digit, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. When displayed, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the third digit display portion and the fourth digit display portion.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 is based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030 based on the set value set at that time. It is possible to sequentially change the display to short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2.

  In the characteristic section 112IW, the display monitor 112IW029 exemplifies a form in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base at each set value can be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The monitor 112IW029 may be able to display only one numerical value or only any two numerical values among these connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, the present characteristic part 112IW exemplifies a mode in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 112IW029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the history of the awarded number of awarded balls on the display monitor 112IW029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Good.

(Setting change processing)
Next, a description will be given of a change in the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 112IW. FIG. 20-8 and FIG. 20-9 are flowcharts showing the game control main process in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the present characteristic unit 112IW, the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

  After the initial setting, the CPU 103 waits for activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. The timer is set (step 112 IWS003). In this case, a sufficient time from the start of power supply to the gaming machine to the start of the effect control CPU 120 is set in the effect control means activation wait timer. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 112IWS004), and checks whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 112IWS005). If the value of the effect control unit activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 112IWS004, and the processing of steps 112IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control unit activation waiting timer is 0, the flow shifts to step 112IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 112 IWS 003 to S 005, the processing after step 112 IWS 006 is executed after the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the setting values are changed or confirmed, the RAM is initialized or restored, and the like. Is done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands, such as a setting value command, an initialization designation command, and a command at the time of recovery, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the command is not lost. This can be prevented from occurring.

  Next, for example, the CPU 103 sets a factory setting flag in the RAM 102 indicating that the setting at the time of shipment from the factory is maintained (for example, this flag is cleared even when RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). Is not set, and is cleared when a setting change process described later is executed). In step 112IWS006, it is determined whether or not this factory setting flag is set. do it. Not limited to such a mode, for example, a value (for example, “0” or “−”) indicating that the value is set at the time of factory shipment is set as a set value, and the value of the set value is set in step 112IWS006. May be checked whether or not is still the value at the time of shipment from the factory. If the settings at the time of factory shipment remain (step 112 IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If the setting is not the factory setting (step 112 IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the data to the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same processing as step S4. It is determined whether or not the data is stored (step 112IWS007). Specifically, in step 112IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) by the same processing as in step S5, and the data is normal. It is determined whether or not (step 112 IWS008). In step 112IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 112 IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 112IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 checks whether or not a setting change flag indicating that the current set value is being changed is set (step 112IWS009). ). If the setting change flag is set (step 112 IWS009; No), that is, if power supply to the gaming machine is restarted due to a power interruption or the like while the setting value is being changed, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

  In step 112IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control of transmitting a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 112IWS010). Note that the CPU 103 may perform control to display a display (for example, display of “E”) indicating a RAM abnormality error on the display monitor 112IW029.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on or not (step 112IWS012). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear 1 process (step 112IWS014). In the RAM clear 1 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 processing, the area other than the area for storing the performance display information such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio and the base in the storage area of the RAM 102 is cleared, and the performance display such as the connection ratio, the combination ratio and the base is cleared. Information is retained without being cleared. In the RAM clear 1 process, the value of the set value stored in the RAM 102 is also cleared. Then, control goes to a step 112IWS027.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door opening sensor 112IW090 is off (N in step 112IWS011), when the setting key 112IW051 is off (N in step 112IWS012), or when the output signal from the clear switch is off (N in step 112IWS012). In step 112IWS013, N), the process does not proceed to step 112IWS014, but proceeds to the loop process.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS006 to S014, in the present feature unit 112IW, when the backup RAM is not normal (N in steps 112IWS007 and S008), or when the factory default settings are left (step S112WSS007, S008). In the case of 112IWS006, if a power interruption or the like occurs during the setting change (Y in step 112IWS009), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the gaming machine frame 112IW003 opened. The RAM is cleared on condition that the setting value is changed, and the set value can be changed after step 112 IWS027. On the other hand, unless the game machine frame 112IW003 is opened and the setting key 112IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, the loop processing is executed, the set value cannot be changed, and the game control does not proceed.

  If the setting change flag is not set (step 112IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 112IWS015).

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS016). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on or not (step 112IWS017). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing start command indicating that the setting confirmation processing is to be started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS018). Upon receiving the setting confirmation processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is transmitted from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or emits a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

  Upon completion of the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 112IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply by the same process as step S6. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation processing end command indicating that the setting confirmation processing has been completed to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS021). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS016) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as step S6. Thus, a recovery process (step 112IWS022) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply is performed. In the recovery processing, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing recovery from the power interruption to the effect control board 12 by the same processing as in step S7 (step 112IWS023). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear 2 process (step 112 IWS024). In the RAM clear 2 process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets an initial value in a work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 processing, an area other than an area for storing performance display information such as a connection ratio, a combination ratio, and a base and an area for storing a set value among the storage areas of the RAM 102 are cleared. Information for performance display such as the winning combination and the base, and the information of the set value are retained without being cleared.

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWS025). If the output signal from door open sensor 112IW090 is on, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 112IW051 is on or not (step 112IWS026). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets the setting change flag (step 112IWS027).

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change processing start command indicating that the setting change processing is started to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS028). Upon receiving the setting change processing start command, the effect control board 12 performs control to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 or a predetermined image is output from the speakers 8L and 8R). Or emits a decorative illuminant such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (step 112IWS029).

  When the setting change processing is completed, the CPU 103 resets the setting change flag (step 112IWS030). Further, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS031). In addition, a setting change processing end command indicating that the setting change processing has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 112IWS032). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

  On the other hand, when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (N in step 112IWS025) or when the setting key 112IW051 is not on (N in step 112IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as step S9. Transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, control goes to a step 112IWS034.

  In the characteristic section 112IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to SWS36 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

  Next, the setting confirmation processing (step 112IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20A is a flowchart illustrating the setting confirmation process (step 112IWS019).

In the setting confirmation processing, the CPU 103 first specifies the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified setting value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSA01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSA02). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA03). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSA02, and the processing of steps 112IWSA02 to SA03 is repeatedly executed. In other words, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on.

  If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting confirmation error process (step 112IWSA04). Then, the process proceeds to a loop process. In step 112IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting confirmation error, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the reception of the command on the effect control CPU 120 side. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. In this example, when the setting confirmation error processing is executed, the processing shifts to the loop processing, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, so that the processing does not proceed.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting confirmation processing ends.

  Next, the setting change process (step 112 IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10 (B) is a flowchart showing the setting change process (step 112 IWS029).

  In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first specifies the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the specified set value on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB01).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting change switch 112IW052 is ON (step 112IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 112IW052 is not on, the flow shifts to step 112IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting switch 112IW052 is ON (Y in step 112IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 (step 112IWSB03). For example, when “1” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 is updated to “2”, and when “2” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029. Updates the display on the display monitor 112IW029 to “3”, and when “3” is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 112IW029, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 may be updated to “1”. Further, the CPU 103 stores the set value (the set value after update) displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updates the set value already stored) (step 112IWSB04).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting key 112IW051 is on (step 112IWSB05). If the setting key 112IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process proceeds to step 112IWSB02, and the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed. That is, while the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is open and the setting key 112IW051 is on, the processing of steps 112IWSB02 to SB06 is repeatedly executed.

  If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on, the CPU 103 executes a setting change error process (step 112IWSB07). Then, the process proceeds to a loop process. In step 112IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting change error, and execute the setting change error notification based on the reception of the command by the effect control CPU 120. Good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may perform error notification by lighting an error LED on a board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting change error processing is executed, the processing shifts to the loop processing, so that the error state is continued until the power is turned on again so that the processing does not proceed. In this case, since the setting-change flag is still set in step 112IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (see Y in step 112IWS009 and 112IWS014), and The error state will be released.

  If the setting key 112IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on (step 112IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on, the process of step 112IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is not on (that is, if the gaming machine frame 112IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process ends.

  Note that the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in step 112ISWSA01 of the setting confirmation process. Further, the specified setting value may be displayed on the image display device 5 in the 112IWSB01 of the setting change process. Then, the subsequent processing may be executed using the image display device 5.

  Also, during execution of the setting confirmation processing and the setting change processing shown in FIG. 20-10, the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are not displayed during the normal game (for example, all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned on or blinked). Mode). By notifying using the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B in this way, it is possible to appropriately notify the player of the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. It should be noted that the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B may be configured to be different between the setting confirmation state and the setting change state.

If the power is cut off during the execution of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 20-10, the setting change processing is executed again, and the updated set values are stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM). As long as the setting change is not completed, an error may occur. Specifically, at the start of the setting change process, a setting change flag (not erased even when the RAM is cleared) is stored in the same backup RAM as the backup RAM for storing the set value, and when the setting change process ends, the setting change is performed. When the flag is turned off and a process other than the setting change process (for example, the game control main process) is executed, if the setting change flag is on, an error is generated. As described above, in a situation in which the setting change process does not proceed normally on the way, the clerk at the game hall may mistakenly think that the setting change has been completed even though it has not been completed. In such a case, if the setting change is not completed, an error occurs, so that the complete completion of the setting change can be secured.

  Also, in steps 112IWSA01 and 112IWSB01 of FIG. 20-10, the current set value is read from the backup RAM and the set value is displayed. However, when the backup to the backup RAM is not performed normally, information indicating an error is displayed on the image display device 5 and the special symbol display devices 4A and 4B are displayed in a mode different from that during the normal game. (For example, a mode in which all the segments of the 7-segment LED are turned off, a mode in which all the segments are turned on if the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are all turned on).

  FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram of the processing executed when the power is turned on. In the present feature section 112IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 112IW051 is on at power-on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 112IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, the setting change process (steps 112IWS005 to S010) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process (steps 112IWS015 to S017) is executed. When the setting key 112IW051 is off when the power is turned on, if the clear switch is on, an initialization process (step S8) is performed. If the clear switch is off, a recovery process (step S6) is performed. Be executed.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change processing will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12 (A) and 20-12 (B), when the power is turned off (turned off) by an operation of a game room clerk or the like, the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is reduced. When the supply is stopped, the display on the display monitor 112IW029 ends. In addition, when the big win is opened at the timing of turning off the power, such as during a big hit game, the supply of power to the solenoid 82 is stopped to close the big win.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (C), when a store clerk or the like at the game hall turns on the power while operating the clear switch (Yes in step S3 of the game control main process), the setting key 112IW051 is turned on. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that the setting is satisfied, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029.

  In the state where the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 112IW029, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (D), the CPU 103 detects the operation of the setting changeover switch 112IW052 by the clerk of the game hall or the like. The numerical values displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, each time the setting switch 112IW052 is operated, updated as 1 → 2 → 3 → 1 →...).

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12 (E), the CPU 103 changes the setting value displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 to the RAM (Update storage) in the backup area. At this time, based on the operation of the display changeover switch 112IW030, the CPU 103 displays the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, The base 1 and the base 2 are displayed. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. In addition, when the special winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20A (timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), the RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory about the big hit is erased, the big winning opening remains closed. Thereafter, the CPU 103 ends the setting change process and enters a state in which a game can be played, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variable pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 20F, the CPU 103 displays “EEEE” on the display monitor 112IW029 based on the occurrence of an error in the RAM 102 in which the setting value is stored. It is possible to do.

  Note that, in the setting change process in the feature unit 112IW, a mode in which the set value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, the initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029 in the setting change processing is the most unfavorable setting value for the player (“1” in the case of the present feature section 112IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. The set value (“3” in the case of the present feature unit 112IW) may be displayed.

(Special design normal processing)
Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the feature section 112IW will be described. FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total number of reserved storages (the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number) (step 112IWS101). For example, the count value of a total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number is confirmed.

  If the total reserved storage count is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved storage count is 0 (step 112IWS102). For example, it is confirmed whether or not the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0. If the second reserved number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to "2" (step 112 IWS103). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 112IWS104).

  By performing the processing of steps 112IWS102 to S104, in the present characteristic portion 112IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with higher priority than the variable display of the first special symbol. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are fluctuated according to the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first starting winning port and the second starting winning port. May be executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS 105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 sets each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 112 IWS 106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved storage number counter by one and sets the value of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. When the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by one, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 103 stores the first reserved storage buffer in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4). Each of the stored random numbers is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved storages = n-1. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each of the numbers stored in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

  Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved storage numbers (or the respective second reserved storage numbers) are always the first reserved storage number (or (The number of the second reserved storage) = 1, 2, 3, and 4.

  Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending storages by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step 112 IWS 107). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Next, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 112 IWS 108). As described above, in the present characteristic unit 112, the setting value command is transmitted when the setting change process is executed at the time of power-on by executing the process of step 112 IWS011, but the step value is also transmitted after the power-on. A set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the processing of the 112 IWS 108.

  Even if the same variation pattern is used, if different variation pattern commands are transmitted for each set value, variation pattern commands of the total number of variation patterns × the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. And the data capacity may be increased. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only variation pattern commands corresponding to the specific variation pattern are provided with variation pattern commands for the number of set values. Good. In this case, for example, the setting value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation having the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation has the fluctuation pattern commands corresponding to the number of the setting values. May be provided.

  In this example, the same setting value command is transmitted as the setting value command transmitted at power-on (see step 112IWS011) and the setting value command transmitted at the start of fluctuation (see step 112IWS108). The embodiment is not limited to this. For example, it is also possible to configure the set value command for power-on and the set value command for start of fluctuation as separate commands, and to transmit different set value commands between power-on and start of fluctuation. Good.

In addition, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted separately from the fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown. However, it is configured to transmit an effect control command that combines the fluctuation pattern command and the set value command. Is also good. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted when the set value is “1”, and when the variation value is “2”, The variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is “3”, the variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

  In addition, the microcomputer 100 for game control is configured to be able to output the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) irrespective of the set value, and the effect control CPU 120 side determines which set value it is. A configuration may be adopted in which one of the variation patterns is selected and the selection ratio is made different. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, and if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is increased. The selection may be performed at a ratio, or if the set value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high ratio. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may be configured so that the presence / absence of a pseudo run, the number of pseudo runs, the presence / absence of reach, and the type are different. In this case, for example, when the set value command is not normally received, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected. When the set value command is not normally received, a dedicated selection ratio is used. May be used to select a variation pattern.

  Further, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of the change is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of the change.

  In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 112IWS109). In this case, for example, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probable change state background designation command when in the probable change state, and controls to transmit a time reduction state background designation command when it is in the time reduction state, and is in the normal state. In this case, control for transmitting the normal state background designation command is performed.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random number value MR1, and determining that a match is obtained if they match. That is, it is a program for executing the process of determining a big hit.

  If the random number value MR1 does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step 112IWS110), the process proceeds to step 112IWS116.

  If the value of the random number value MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 112 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to match the type corresponding to the value of the random number value MR2 for the jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area (“big hit type A”). , "Big hit type B" or "big hit type C") is determined as the big hit type (step 112 IWS 114).

  Further, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 112 IWS 115). For example, when the big hit type is “big hit type A”, “01” is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “big hit type B”, “02” is set as the data showing the big hit type. When the big hit type is "big hit type C", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 112IWS116). For example, when the big hit flag is not set, "-" which is a lost symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. For example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol “7” is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. In addition, a different special symbol may be determined as a stop symbol depending on the big hit type.

  Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 112IWS117).

(Direction mode change processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means in the present feature section 112IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process in the characteristic unit 112IW. In the present feature unit 112IW, in the effect control main process, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control random number update process of step S77, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect mode change process of changing the effect mode (step 112IWS201). The process returns to step S73.

  In the present characteristic portion 112IW, it is possible to control to three types of effect modes of effect mode A to effect mode C. For example, the background screen of the image display device 5 differs depending on which effect mode is controlled, The types of characters that appear in the notice production and the reach production are different. In the effect mode change processing of step 112IWS201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control for changing the current effect mode to a different effect mode when predetermined effect mode change conditions are satisfied. For example, when a real-time clock is mounted on the effect control board 12, the effect mode may be changed based on the fact that a predetermined date or time has been reached based on the date and time information from the real-time clock. Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

  In step 112IWS201, when the effect control CPU 120 changes the effect mode, for example, a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change may be set, and a flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change may be reset. For example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode A, the effect mode A flag may be set, and the effect mode B flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Further, for example, when the mode is changed to the effect mode C, the effect mode C flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or the effect mode B flag before the change may be reset.

  The way of changing the production mode may be such that the production mode is changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A →. The mode A to C may be randomly changed.

  (Command analysis processing)

  FIG. 20-16 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of the command analysis processing (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer. In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 checks the content of the command stored in the command receiving buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not a received command is stored in the command receiving buffer (step 112IWS301). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (step 112IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 112IWS303). The reason for adding +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 112 IWS 304), effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in a set value storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 112 IWS 304). 112 IWS 305). Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a set value command reception flag indicating that the set value command has been normally received at least once since the power of the gaming machine was turned on (step 112IWS306).

  In the present characteristic part 112IW, since the power of the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area indicate the power supply to the gaming machine. Cleared when is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the process is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. You. Since the effect control board 12 is started in a state where the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when executing the setting confirmation processing or the recovery processing. The configuration may be such that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

  Also, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, the setting value command is transmitted when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and the setting change process is performed. However, the setting value command is not normally transmitted due to a missing command or garbled data. Is not received, the process of step 112 IWS 305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in the present feature 112IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display. Therefore, the processing of step 112IWS 305 is performed based on the received set value command thereafter. The setting value is executed, and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

  Also, even if the set value command is received, the set value command included in the set value command may be an abnormal value. You may comprise so that it may determine whether the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the set value is configured to be set to any value of “1” to “3”, but includes a value that should not be set, such as “5” or “10”. In such a case, the setting value included in the setting value command may be determined to be abnormal. Further, for example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and thereafter, when a new set value command is received, the new set value command is used. When the indicated set value does not match the previously stored set value, it may be determined that an inconsistency has occurred and that it is determined to be abnormal. Then, even when it is determined that the set value included in the set value command is an abnormal value, it is determined that the set value command has not been normally received, and the effect is limited according to the processing method indicated by the present feature unit 112IW. May be configured.

(Initial appearance setting)
In the feature control unit 112IW, when any one of an initialization designation command, a restoration command, a setting change processing end command, and a setting confirmation processing end command is received from the main board 11 in the command analysis processing on the effect control board 12 side. In the image display device 5, a control for displaying a predetermined initial appearance (specifically, a combination of effect symbols and displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started) is performed. (Hereinafter, also referred to as an initial appearance effect).

  If the received effect control command is a setting change processing end command (step 112IWS307), effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set value that is set, an even numbered effect pattern (for example, “246” or “224”), which is a combination of even numbered effect symbols, and an odd number of effect symbols using the initial value determination table. It is determined to be either an odd initial number (for example, “135” or “113”) or a special initial number that is a combination of effect symbols including special symbols (eg, star symbols) (step 112IWS309). . Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS 314.

  FIG. 20-17 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the initial appearance determination table. In step 112IWS309, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed in accordance with the allocation of the judgment values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. Determine the result. In the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. 20A, the odd number initial appearance is higher in the order of setting values “1” <“2” <“3”. Therefore, in the image display device 5 before the start of the game, if the odd initial number is displayed, the setting change has been made, and the set value which is advantageous compared to the case where the even initial number is displayed. It is suggested that it is set to. Also, as shown in FIG. 20A, a special initial roll may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, if a special initial roll is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give a motivation to play the game from an early time slot in the business hours of the game store, and to enhance interest.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112 IWS 310). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the initial value is determined using the initial value determination table shown in FIG. 20-17 (A) assuming that the setting value is “1” (step 112IWS311). ). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS 314.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS 310 to S311, the present feature unit 112IW sets the most disadvantageous setting value if the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode is A. The initial roll is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 20-17 (A), for the set value “1”, the odds of being determined to be the initial number is the lowest, and the special initial number is not determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which odd initial numbers or special initial numbers are displayed and the player is discouraged even though disadvantageous set values are set. In order to prevent the decline.

If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS312). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines an initial outcome using the initial effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS313). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS 314.

  FIG. 20-17 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial appearance determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-17 (B), in the initial appearance determination table for effect mode C, an odd initial appearance is determined as compared with the case where the setting value “3” is most advantageous for the player. The ratio is low, and there is no case where a special initial roll is determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS312 to S313, in the present feature unit 112IW, if the set value command has not been normally received and the effect mode C is set, an unfavorable set value is set. In spite of this, odd initial numbers and special initial numbers are displayed to reduce a situation in which the player is discouraged and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, effect control CPU 120 controls image display device 5 to display the initial appearance determined in steps 112 IWS 309, S 311, and S 313 (step 112 IWS 314).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial effect as an even initial effect, and the image display device 5. In, control for displaying even-numbered initial rolls is performed (step 112 IWS 315).

  By executing the processing of step 112IWS315, in the present feature unit 112IW, even if the set value command is not normally received and the effect mode is B, the even numbered initial result is displayed uniformly. Thereby, even if an unfavorable setting value is set, it is possible to reduce a situation in which an odd initial number or a special initial number is displayed and the player is discouraged, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented. I have to.

  In addition, even when the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, the odd initial appearance symbol may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, using the table in which the odd initial appearance symbol determination ratio is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the initial appearance determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that an eye symbol may be determined.

  In this example, the case where the set value command was not normally received and the effect mode B is displayed, and the case where the even-numbered initial roll is uniformly displayed is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command was not normally received and the set value command was not normally received, such as a combination of symbols "???" It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Such a combination of symbols that does not suggest setting values at all in any form may be displayed as an initial result.

Further, the processing when the set value command is not normally received (or when the set value is not properly stored) is not limited to the processing shown in this example. For example, when it is determined to be N in step 112 IWS 308, the setting value “1” may be stored in the setting value storage area as a default to determine the initial roll. In addition, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value “4”) indicating that the setting value command could not be normally received is stored in the setting value storage area, and the initial appearance is determined. Is also good.

  If the received effect control command is any one of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration, and the setting confirmation processing end command (step 112IWS316), that is, if the setting change processing has not been executed, the effect control CPU 120 Then, the initial roll is determined as an even initial roll, and the image display device 5 performs control to display the even initial roll (step 112IWS317). In the characteristic section 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial roll is determined to be an even initial roll and is not determined to be an odd initial roll. It may be determined to be either an eye or an odd initial number. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

  If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 112IWS318), effect control CPU 120 executes a RAM error notification (step 112IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as “RAM error abnormality has occurred” on the image display device 5 or outputs a sound or error sound indicating the RAM error abnormality from the speakers 8L and 8R. And controls the game effect lamp 9 and the LED to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when performing the RAM error abnormality notification, the maximum volume sound or error sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 and the LED emit light at the maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED, Is desirable to emit white light).

  If the received effect control command is any other command, effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 112IWS320). For example, if the received effect control command is a variation pattern command, the received variation pattern command is stored in a variation pattern command storage area provided in the RAM 122, and a variation pattern command reception flag is set. For example, if the received effect control command is a display result designation command, the received display result designation command is stored in a display result designation command storage area provided in the RAM 122. Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS301.

  In addition, in the present characteristic unit 112IW, when the setting change process is not executed at the time of turning on the power, the odd initial roll is not displayed. However, the odd initial roll may be displayed. Good. Also in this case, the ratio determined for the odd initial appearance may be different depending on the setting value (that is, the setting value may be suggested).

  In addition, for example, instead of or in addition to the odd initial number and the even initial number, an initial number that denies the possibility of a specific set value (for example, the possibility that the set value is 1 is denied, and A value 2 or a set value 3 is determined), or an initial roll that determines a specific set value may be provided, and displayed according to the set value. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by not determining the specific initial roll, when the specific initial roll is displayed, the possibility of the setting value 1 is denied and the setting value 2 or It is determined that the setting value is 3. In addition, for example, by determining a specific initial roll only in the case of the setting value 3, when the specific initial roll is displayed, the setting value 3 is determined. . Further, at the time of determining the initial outcome, any one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting suggestion effect)
In the present feature section 112IW, the setting value is configured to be changeable, and as a setting suggestion effect suggesting the setting value, a pre-game suggestion effect executed before the start of the game, the above-mentioned initial appearance effect, and during the game (for example, , A suggestion effect during a game executed during the fluctuation display of the effect symbol), a setting suggestion based on the tendency to determine the fluctuation pattern described above, and a suggestion effect during the big hit executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game). Have been. In addition, in the present feature unit 112IW, the suggestion effect before the game, the suggestion effect during the game, and the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed by a plurality of types of effect modes each having a different reliability of the suggestion. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each. For example, the reliability of the suggestion may be made higher in the order of the pre-game suggestion effect> the big hit suggestion effect> the game suggestion effect, or the pre-game suggestion effect> the game suggestion effect> the big hit suggestion effect, The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect before the game, or the order of the suggestion effect during the big hit> the suggestion effect during the game> the suggestion effect before the game. Further, the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect may be settable. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute all or some of the setting suggestion effects (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect or an initial effect effect indicating that a setting change has been performed), or does not execute the ratio. The setting may be changed so as to lower (or increase). For example, the setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and the setting related to the setting suggestion effect is performed by operating the operating means such as the push button 31B or the operating means such as the switch provided inside the gaming machine (only the administrator can operate). May be changed.

(Variable display start wait processing)
FIG. 20-18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 sets a fluctuation start command reception flag (for example, a fluctuation pattern command reception flag) indicating that a command designating the start of the variable display has been received from the main board 11. It is confirmed whether or not there is (step 112 IWS401).

  If the fluctuation start command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end the process if the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (steps 112IWS402 and 112112WS). Then, the variable start command reception flag is reset (step 112IWS404), the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" (step 112IWS405), and the variable display start waiting process ends.

  If the fluctuation start command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the timing result by the timing means matches the predetermined condition unless the customer waiting demonstration effect is being executed (N in step 112IWS406). Is confirmed (step 112 IWS407). In step 112 IWS 407, for example, if the timer (for example, set for 30 seconds) set when the previous variable display (display result “losing”) has ended, it is determined that the predetermined condition is met. Also, when the timer is not set (that is, after the power is turned on, the fluctuation display has not been performed once and the game is not started), it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, when a predetermined period has elapsed without performing the variable display (and when the game has not been controlled to the big hit game state) or before the game has started, the predetermined condition is satisfied, and a customer waiting demonstration effect is performed by processing described later. Will be executed.

  If the result of the time measurement by the time measurement means matches the predetermined condition, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the number of times of fluctuation after power-on is 0 (step 112IWS408). That is, in step 112IWS408, it is confirmed whether the game has not been started yet.

If the number of fluctuations after power-on is 0, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112 IWS 409). If the set value command reception flag has been set (that is, if the set value command has been normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the value of the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122 based on the set value. Using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table, it is determined whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode in the case of executing the pre-game suggestion effect according to the set value (step 112IWS).
410). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS 415.

  In the present feature portion 112IW, when the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the first effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is changed to the first special color (blue) different from the normal color (for example, white). When the customer waiting demonstration effect of the mode including the pre-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode is executed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the second special color (red), and the pre-game suggestion effect of the third effect mode is performed. When the customer demonstration demonstration including the aspect is performed, the decorative lamp is controlled to the third special color (rainbow color).

  FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table. In step 112IWS410, a lottery process based on a random number is performed according to the allocation of the determination value according to the set value stored in the set value storage area, using the pre-game suggestive effect determination table shown in FIG. The presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined. In the pre-game suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 20-19 (A), determination values are assigned in the order of setting values “1” <“2” <“3” so that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate. Have been. Also, the determination values are assigned such that the ratio determined in the second effect mode increases in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. With such a configuration, it is suggested that the pre-game suggestion effect is executed, and that it is set to an advantageous set value by being executed in the second effect mode rather than in the first effect mode. Become. In addition, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect, it is suggested that the setting has been changed when the power is turned on. In addition, as shown in FIG. 20A, the third effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the pre-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the setting has been changed and that the setting value is “3”.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. CPU 120 for use checks whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112 IWS 411). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect by using the pre-game suggestion effect determination table illustrated in FIG. And the effect form is determined (step 112 IWS412). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS 415.

  By executing the processing of steps 112 IWS 411 to S 412, in the present feature unit 112 IW, the setting value command which is the most disadvantageous setting is set when the setting value command is not normally received and the effect mode is A. The presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIG. 20A, for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode is the lowest, and there is no case where the third effect mode is determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous set value being set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS413). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not the pre-game suggestion effect is to be executed and the effect mode (step 112IWS414). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS 415.

  FIG. 20-19 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-19 (B), in the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, it is determined that the pre-game suggestion effect is to be executed as compared with the case of the set value “2” or “3”. Ratio itself is low, the ratio determined as the first effect mode or the second effect mode is low, and the third effect mode is not determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS413 to S414, in the present feature unit 112IW, an unfavorable set value is set when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. Despite this, the situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Then, effect control CPU 120 performs control to execute a customer waiting demonstration effect in a mode including the pre-game suggestion effect determined in steps 112IWS410, S412, and S414 (step 112IWS415). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process ends.

  On the other hand, if the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, if the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112IWS416. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the pre-game suggestion effect.

  By executing the process of step 112IWS413, the present feature unit 112IW does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect by not executing the pre-game suggestion effect when the set value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode is the effect mode B. Even if an unfavorable setting value is set, a situation in which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  Even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, a pre-game suggestion effect may be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, by using a table in which the execution ratio of the pre-game suggestion effect is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. You may comprise so that presence or absence and a kind of suggestion effect may be determined.

  It should be noted that the execution ratio is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG. 20A, and is different depending on the set value only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes. It may be.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be not determined, the setting is performed when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed. The possibility of value 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is set value 2 or set value 3. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only in the case of the setting value 3, by making it determined to a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

In the present characteristic portion 112IW, it is possible to execute a pre-game suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value. However, this is based on the pre-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode and the (Including three performance modes), the execution ratio of the first performance mode, the second performance mode, and the third performance mode differs depending on the set value, and only the specific performance mode depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  Note that, in the present feature section 112IW, the setting is not changed when the power is turned on, and if the set value command has not yet been received, the pre-game suggestion effect is not executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-game suggestion effect may be executable even when the setting is not changed. In this case, the presence / absence of the pre-game suggestion effect may be determined at a different ratio between when the setting change is performed and when the setting change is not performed, and the effect mode when the effect is performed may be determined.

  For example, FIG. 20-19 (C) is a pre-game suggestion effect determination table used when a command at the time of restoration is received. Comparing the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (A) with the pre-game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-19 (C), when a command at the time of restoration is received, that is, the setting change When not performed, the rate at which the pre-game suggestion effect is executed is lower than when the setting change is performed, and the difference in the execution rate between the set values is smaller. By doing so, the reliability of the suggestion by the pre-game suggestion effect can be made different between when the setting change is performed and when the setting change is not performed.

  If the number of fluctuations after the power is turned on is not 0, the CPU 120 performs control for executing a customer waiting demonstration effect including execution history information of the setting suggestion effect (excluding the pre-game suggestion effect) (step 112IWS416). Thereafter, the variable display start waiting process ends.

  When the processing of step 112 IWS 416 is executed, for example, on the image display device 5, an execution history indicating the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect (the suggestion effect during a game or the suggestion effect during a big hit), the execution content (the effect mode at the time of execution), and the like A customer waiting demonstration effect in which information is displayed is executed. When the processing of step 112 IWS 416 is executed, a customer waiting demonstration is performed. When a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B) is performed during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration, The image display device 5 may display the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the number of executions and the content of the setting suggestion effect (initial effect effect, suggestion effect before game, suggestion effect during game, suggestion effect during big hit, etc.) (effect mode at the time of execution) are shown. Information may be stored, and an effect of estimating a setting value from the information and notifying the setting value may be made executable. Note that this effect is to notify a setting expectation degree (or an estimated setting value) calculated based on a predetermined criterion from the execution state of the setting suggestive effect, and not to notify an actual setting value. .

  In the feature section 112IW, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only before the game is started by the processing of steps 112IWS408 to 112IWS415. In addition, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect is displayed during the customer waiting demonstration effect by the processing of step 112IWS416, but the information regarding the pre-game suggestion effect is excluded. With such a configuration, it is possible to give an interest to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the start of the game, to give a motivation to play the game from an early time slot of the business hours of the game store, and to enhance interest. . The present invention is not limited to the example of the feature section 112IW. For example, using a real-time clock or the like, the pre-game suggestion effect is executed only in a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Is also good. Further, the execution history information of the setting suggestion effect may not include information on the game suggestion effect during the special period.

In addition to the configuration of the feature section 112IW, the number of executions and the contents of the setting suggestion effect are accumulated as execution history information, and a two-dimensional code or the like including the execution history information is displayed on the image display device 5 at the end of the game or the like. May be configured. Further, when a player uses a portable terminal such as a mobile phone with a camera function to photograph a two-dimensional code displayed on the gaming machine and transmits the two-dimensional code to a Web server on the Internet, the Web server uses the received information based on the received information. The game history of the player may be managed, and a process of giving a predetermined privilege according to the game history may be performed. Further, the execution history information may be acquired by the player accessing the Web server using the portable terminal (or analyzing the two-dimensional code), and may be displayed on the display device provided in the portable terminal. Further, the setting suggestion image indicating the setting value may be displayed on the display device provided in the mobile terminal by reading the two-dimensional code including the execution history information using the mobile terminal. For example, a setting value estimated from the execution history information based on a predetermined criterion is calculated, and a setting suggestion image indicating the calculated setting value (just an estimation and different from the actual setting value) is displayed. You may.

(During game suggestion effect determination processing)
FIG. 20-20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the in-game suggestion effect determination process. The in-game suggestive effect determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171). In the in-game suggestive effect determination process, if the effect is in the special period (Y in step 112IWS501), the effect control CPU 120 selects the first in-game suggestive effect determination table (step 112IWS502), and is not in the special period. In this case (step 112IWS501: N), the second in-game suggestive effect determination table is selected (step 112IWS503). For example, a special period flag is set when a setting change end command or a set value command is received, and when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), the special period flag is reset. For example, by checking the state of the special period flag, it is possible to check in step 112 IWS 501 whether the special period is in progress.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112 IWS 504). If the set value command reception flag is set (that is, if the set value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect control is to be performed based on the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122. Using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table, the presence / absence of execution of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution are determined (step 112IWS505).

  FIG. 20-21 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first in-game suggestive effect determination table used in the special period, and FIG. 20-21 (B) is a second in-game suggestive effect used in the non-special period. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a determination table.

  In the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The judgment value is assigned so that the rate of the judgment is high. With such a configuration, execution of the in-game suggestion effect indicates that it is set to an advantageous set value.

  Further, in the second effect mode (mini-characters A and B appear), the rate of execution of the set value “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the first effect mode (mini-character A appears). The determination value is assigned such that the difference in the execution ratio between the set values becomes larger than the set value. In other words, the second effect mode has a high degree of reliability for being set to a more advantageous set value than the first effect mode.

  Also, in the first and second in-game suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), the in-game suggestion effect of the second effect mode having high reliability is executed only during the special period. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to motivate a player to play a game during a special period, and to enhance interest.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), only when the set value is “3”, the third
There is a case where the effect is determined in the effect mode (character C appearance). Therefore, by executing the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, it is determined that the set value is “3”.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112 IWS 506). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected in-game suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 112 IWS507).

  By executing the processing of steps 112 IWS 506 to S 507, in the present feature unit 112 IW, if the set value command has not been normally received and the effect mode A is set, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting is set. The presence or absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio itself determined to execute the suggestion effect during the game is low, and the ratio determined to be the second effect mode. Is the lowest, and there is no case where the third effect mode is determined. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a situation in which the suggested effect during the game is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged despite the disadvantageous setting value being set. In addition, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS508). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 uses the in-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C to determine whether or not to execute the in-game suggestion effect and to determine the effect mode (step 112IWS509).

  FIG. 20-21 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the in-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C. As shown in FIG. 20-21 (C), in the in-game suggestive effect determination table for effect mode C, the ratio determined to execute the in-game suggestive effect is lower than in the case of the setting value “3”. There is no case where the third effect mode is determined.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS508 to S509, in the present feature unit 112IW, an unfavorable set value is set when the set value command cannot be normally received and in the effect mode C. In spite of the fact, the situation where the suggested effect during the game is executed in the second effect mode or the third effect mode and the player is discouraged is reduced, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 ends the process. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the in-game suggestion effect.

  By executing the process of step 112IWS508, the present feature unit 112IW does not execute the in-game suggestion effect when the set value command has not been normally received and when the effect mode is the effect mode B. Even if an unfavorable setting value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a game is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  In addition, even if the set value command has not been normally received in the effect mode B, it may be configured to be able to execute the in-game suggestion effect at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the game suggestion effect is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the game suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence / absence and type of the suggested effect during the game may be determined.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B), and is executed according to the set value only in a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes. The ratios may be different.

  Further, for example, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes is executed, the possibility of a specific set value may be denied. For example, in the case of the setting value 1, by setting the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) to be not determined, the setting is performed when the specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed. The possibility of value 1 is denied, and it is determined that the value is set value 2 or set value 3. In addition, when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, a specific set value may be determined. For example, only in the case of the setting value 3, by making it determined to a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode), when a specific effect mode (for example, the second effect mode) is executed, It is determined that the setting value is 3.

  In the present characteristic portion 112IW, it is possible to execute the in-game suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value. However, this is based on the in-game suggestion effect (the first effect mode, the second effect mode, and the second effect mode) in accordance with the set value. (Including three performance modes), the execution ratio of the first performance mode, the second performance mode, and the third performance mode differs depending on the set value, and only the specific performance mode depending on the set value This is a concept that includes different execution ratios.

  In addition, the present feature unit 112IW is configured to be able to execute a suggestion effect during a game in a common mode (for example, the first performance mode) between the special period and the non-special period, but is not limited to such a configuration. Alternatively, it may be possible to execute a suggestion effect during game in a different mode. For example, the size and color of the mini character A may be different between the special period and the non-special period.

  In addition, the present characteristic portion 112IW is configured such that the presence or absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of executing the effect are different depending on whether the period is the special period or the non-special period and the set value. However, in addition to such a configuration, for example, the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the type of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the pseudo continuous effect, and the display result are a big hit. Depending on whether or not it is performed, the presence / absence of the in-game suggestion effect and the effect mode in the case of execution may be made different.

  For example, the suggestion effect during the game may be made executable only at least when the fluctuation pattern includes the reach effect (that is, the fluctuation time is longer than the non-reach change pattern). In addition, for example, in the variation pattern including Super Reach B and the variation pattern including Super Reach A having a higher degree of expectation than Super Reach B, the latter is such that the ratio at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed is higher. The reliability when the suggested effect during the game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggested effect during the game is executed increases, and the reliability when the effect is executed is increased. You may make it high.

In addition, for example, in the variation pattern including the pseudo continuous production and the fluctuation pattern not including the pseudo continuous production (or the number of pseudo consecutive productions is smaller than the former), the former is more likely to execute the suggested effect during the game. May be increased, the reliability when the suggestion effect during the game is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the suggestion effect during the game is executed increases, and when the effect is executed. The reliability may be increased.

  In addition, for example, in a variation pattern in which the display result is a big hit and a variation pattern in which the display result is not a big hit, the former may have a higher ratio of executing the suggestion effect during the game, The reliability when the medium suggestion effect is executed may be increased, or the rate at which the game suggestion effect is executed may increase, and the reliability when the game suggestion effect is executed may increase. .

(Director decision process during big hit)
FIG. 20-22 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a big hit effect determination process. The big hit effect rendering determination process is executed in the big hit opening pre-process (step S114). In the big hit effect determination processing, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 112IWS601). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, if the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 determines the value of the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122 based on the setting value. It is determined whether or not to perform a jackpot suggestion effect, and an effect mode when the effect is executed (step 112IWS602). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS607.

  In step S112IWS602, if it is a period (hereinafter, also referred to as a specific period) from the start of the game until the variable display is executed a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times), the second display shown in FIG. The one big hit big suggestion effect determination table is selected, and if it is not during a specific period, the second big hit big suggestion effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (B) is selected. Then, based on the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table and the set value, the presence / absence of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, and the effect mode in the case of execution is determined. Note that the “game start time” here refers to the time at which the first fluctuation display is started after the power is turned on, but is not limited to this. It may be the time when the display is started, or the time when the first variable display is started after the end of the customer waiting demonstration effect. Further, in the characteristic portion 112IW, a period from the start of the game until a variable display is executed a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) is defined as a specific period regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. However, when the setting is changed when the power is turned on, the period from the start of the game to the execution of the variable display a specific number of times (in this example, 100 times) may be set as the specific period. Also, for example, the specific period is divided into a plurality of periods, and a first specific period (a period from the start of the game until the variable display is executed 50 times) and a second specific period (the 51st fluctuation after the game starts) (A period from the display until the 100th variation display is executed), a jackpot medium suggestion effect determination table in which the presence / absence of the medium hit suggestion effect and the determination ratio of the effect mode are different may be used.

  In the first and second big hit middle suggestion effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), the big hit middle suggestion effect is executed in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3”. The judgment value is assigned so that the rate of the judgment is high. With such a configuration, by executing the suggestion effect during the big hit, it is suggested that the value is set to an advantageous set value.

  In the second effect mode and the third effect mode, the execution ratio in the order of the set values “1” <“2” <“3” is high, and the execution ratio between the set values in the specific period and the non-specific period is high. The determination value is assigned so that the difference becomes larger. In other words, in the specific period, a big hit suggestion effect with higher reliability is executed than in the non-specific period. With such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a specific period, and to enhance interest. The present invention is not limited to the configuration of the feature unit 112IW, and the big hit suggestion effect (or a specific effect mode thereof) may be executed only during a specific period, and may not be executed during a non-specific period.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), the fourth effect mode may be determined only when the set value is “3”. Therefore, by executing the big hit suggestion effect according to the fourth effect mode, it is determined that the setting value is “3”.

  In the present feature section 112IW, when the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the third effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), the effect design that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5. After that, the dialogue C image (“high setting !?”) 112IW102 is displayed as shown in FIG.

  When the big hit suggestion effect is executed in the fourth effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (A1), after the effect design that becomes the big hit is stopped and displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed. As shown in 20-25 (C1), a dialogue D image (“high setting confirmed”) 112IW105 is displayed.

  If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change processing is executed, but the setting value command cannot be normally received due to a command being missed or data being garbled), the production control is performed. CPU 120 for use checks whether or not the current effect mode is effect mode A (step 112 IWS603). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode A flag is set. In the case of the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the medium hit suggestion effect and the effect mode using the selected big hit suggestion effect determination table assuming that the setting value is “1” ( Step 112 IWS 604). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS607.

  By executing the processing of steps 112IWS603 to S604, the present feature unit 112IW sets the most disadvantageous setting value if the setting value command cannot be normally received and the effect mode is A. The presence or absence of the jackpot suggestion effect and the effect mode are determined as “1”. As shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), for the set value “1”, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is the lowest, and is determined as the fourth effect mode. There is no case. With such a configuration, despite the unfavorable setting value being set, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the third effect mode execute a big hit suggestion effect to discourage the player. The situation is reduced to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  If it is not the effect mode A, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the current effect mode is the effect mode C (step 112IWS605). Whether or not the mode is the effect mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the effect mode C flag is set. In the case of the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the during the big hit suggestion effect and the effect mode by using the during the big hit suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 112IWS606). Then, control goes to a step 112 IWS607.

  20-23 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a large hit suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-23 (C), in the jackpot suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, the ratio itself of determining to execute the jackpot suggestion effect is low, and the setting value is “2” or “3”. As compared with the above, the ratio determined as the second effect mode or the third effect mode is lower, and the fourth effect mode is not determined.

By executing the processing of steps 112IWS605 to S606, in the present feature unit 112IW, if the set value command has not been normally received and the effect mode is C, an unfavorable set value is set. Despite the fact that the second production mode, the third production mode, and the third production mode perform a jackpot suggestion production, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is discouraged and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is not the effect mode C (that is, when the current effect mode is the effect mode B), the effect control CPU 120 directly proceeds to step 112 IWS607. That is, in the case of the effect mode B, it is restricted not to execute the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  By executing the processing of step 112IWS605, the present feature unit 112IW does not execute the jackpot suggestion effect when the set value command is not normally received and the effect mode is B, Even if an unfavorable set value is set, a situation in which a suggestion effect during a big hit is executed and the player is discouraged is reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

  In addition, even if the set value command is not normally received in the effect mode B, a configuration may be such that the suggestion effect during the big hit can be executed at a low rate. In this case, for example, a table in which the execution rate of the big hit suggestion effect is set lower overall than the set value “1” of the big hit suggestion effect determination table shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B) is used. Thus, the presence or absence and type of the suggestion effect during the big hit may be determined.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B), and is executed according to the set value only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) among the plurality of effect modes. The ratios may be different.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 20A, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit suggestion effect is always executed, but it may not be executed at a low rate. You may. In this case, the non-execution ratio may be changed according to the set value. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 20B, the rate at which the jackpot suggestion effect is not executed is configured to be the same regardless of the set value. You may make it do.

  In addition, in the present feature unit 112IW, when a big hit occurs in a specific period, a big hit middle suggestion effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. In addition to or instead of such a configuration, A setting suggestion effect (for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a dialog image suggesting a setting value is displayed) may be executed based on a predetermined condition being satisfied during a specific period. In this case, the predetermined condition may be satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of the reach effect or the pseudo continuous effect has reached the predetermined number, or when a specific super reach effect or a notice effect has been executed.

  In the present feature section 112IW, it is possible to execute a jackpot medium suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value, but this is a jackpot medium suggestion effect (first effect mode, second effect mode, third effect mode) according to the set value. (Including the effect mode and the fourth effect mode), the execution ratios of the first effect mode, the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode differ depending on the set value, the setting value This is a concept including that the execution ratio is different only in a specific effect mode (for example, the third effect mode) according to.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the attraction effect (step 112 IWS607).

  Here, for example, as shown in FIG. 20A (A1), it is assumed that the movable member 112IW101 is provided above the image display device 5. In such a configuration, when the accessory effect is executed, control is performed to move the movable member 112IW101 to the front of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20-24 (A1) and (B2), when the accessory effect is executed, the movable member 112IW101 moves to the front of the image display device 5, so that the image display device 5 performs a big hit suggestion effect. The position where the serif image is displayed becomes difficult to recognize. In the present feature portion 112IW, since the big hit suggestion effect and the character effect effect are executed at different timings during the fanfare period in the big hit game, the movable member 112IW101 actually moved to the front of the image display device 5 It does not obscure the line image displayed by the middle suggestion effect. However, if the movable member 112IW101 is operated by the accessory effect during the fanfare period, the player's attention may be directed to the movable member 112IW101, and the dialog image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect may be overlooked. Therefore, in the step 112IWS607, by using the special effect presentation determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (D), when the big hit suggestion effect is executed, the special effect production is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize and lowering the interest. Further, with such a configuration, even when the big hit suggestion effect and the character effect effect are executed at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize.

  When the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined, the execution timing of either the jackpot suggestion effect or the accessory effect is changed (for example, the accessory effect is performed during the fanfare period, and the jackpot suggestion effect is performed. (During the ending period), it may be possible to prevent the suggestion effect during the big hit from becoming difficult to recognize. When the execution of the big hit suggestion effect is determined, the operation mode of the movable member 112IW101 is changed (for example, by controlling not to stop at a position overlapping with the dialog image by the big hit suggestion effect), or The display position of the dialog image by the middle suggestion effect may be changed to prevent the big hit suggestion effect from being difficult to recognize. In addition, when the execution of the jackpot suggestion effect is determined, the execution of the accessory effect may be restricted by reducing the execution ratio of the accessory effect. In addition, the execution of the character effect may be limited only during a specific period. Further, the present invention is not limited to the example illustrated in FIG.

  Next, when not performing the accessory effect (N in step 112IWS608), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a light guide plate effect (step 112IWS609).

  Here, on the front surface of the image display device 5, a light guide plate 112IW103 having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light and a light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate are provided. In addition, it is assumed that a reflector is provided which reflects light incident on the inside of the light guide plate 112IW103 from the end face of the light guide plate 112IW103 by the light emitting body and emits the light to the front surface of the gaming machine. Then, it is possible to execute a light guide plate effect of emitting light from the reflector provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front surface of the gaming machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. In such a configuration, when the light guide plate effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B3), light is emitted from the reflector provided on the light guide plate 112IW103 to the front of the gaming machine, resulting in a "big hit". Character appears. In addition, during execution of the light guide plate effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the image displayed on the image display device 5.

In step 112IWS609, by using the light guide plate effect determination table shown in FIG. 20-23 (E), according to the presence or absence of the effect during the big hit and the effect mode when executed.
Light guide plate effects are executed at different rates. Specifically, when the suggestion effect during the big hit in the first effect mode is executed, the ratio of the light guide plate effect being executed is high, and the suggestion during the big hit in the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is performed. When an effect is performed, the light guide plate effect is configured to be executed at a lower rate. That is, when a big hit suggestion effect of an effect mode that is not suggested to be an advantageous set value is executed, a light guide plate effect is executed at a high rate, and the big hit suggestion effect is configured to be hard to visually recognize. I have. For example, as shown in FIG. 20-24 (B4), when the dialogue A image (“setting is...”) 112IW104 is displayed by the jackpot suggestion effect of the first effect mode, the light guide plate effect is executed. Then, the line A image becomes difficult to visually recognize. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the game entertainment due to a suggestion effect during a big hit in an effect mode that is undesirable for the player. In addition, when the big hit suggestion effect of the second effect mode, the third effect mode, and the fourth effect mode is executed, the execution timing of one of the big hit suggestion effect and the light guide plate effect is changed (for example, the light guide plate). The effect may be performed during the fanfare period, and the suggestion effect during the big hit may be performed during the ending period.

  Note that, in the present feature portion 112IW, the role product effect and the light guide plate effect are executed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. For example, an error displayed on the image display device 9 when an error occurs. The display is also performed in a manner that makes it difficult to recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit. That is, the error display is displayed in preference to the jackpot suggestion effect (or the pre-game suggestion effect or the game suggestion effect). With such a configuration, the occurrence of an error can be appropriately reported. Also, a case where a predetermined effect (for example, a specific effect mode of a fanfare effect) that can be executed simultaneously with the big hit suggestion effect is provided, and the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the big hit suggestion effect. , A suggestion effect during a big hit may be prioritized. Specifically, when the image displayed on the image display device 5 by the predetermined effect is a mode that makes it difficult to recognize the image displayed by the big hit suggestion effect, the image is displayed by the big hit suggestion effect. The image may be preferentially displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the suggestion effect during the big hit.

  Also, in the present feature section 112IW, the effect symbols are variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, but the effect symbols are variably displayed by driving a drum-shaped movable body having the effect symbols arranged on the surface. (That is, it may be applied to a so-called drum-type gaming machine). Alternatively, the effect symbol may be variably displayed by driving a belt-shaped movable body having the effect symbol disposed on the surface (that is, the effect symbol may be applied to a so-called belt reel type gaming machine). In such a drum-type or belt-reel-type gaming machine, the drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body performs a characteristic operation different from the normal operation at the start of the initial change after the setting change (or characteristic). Operation may occur). Therefore, in the initial fluctuation after the setting change, a light guide plate effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable body at the start of the fluctuation may be executed (or the execution ratio is increased). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the setting has been changed.

In addition, in the present feature portion 112IW, the character effect effect and the light guide plate effect are configured so as to be able to reduce the visibility of the suggestion effect during the big hit, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, For example, the visibility of the initial appearance effect, the pre-game suggestion effect, and the game suggestion effect may be reduced by performing the role item effect or the light guide plate effect. Also, in this case, the visibility may be reduced at a high rate when an undesirable indication is given to the player. For example, when an even-numbered initial result is displayed, when a suggestion effect before game in the first effect mode is executed, or when a suggestion effect during game in the first effect mode is executed, the visibility of these is reduced. In this case, the ratio of performing a role effect in which the movable member operates or a light guide plate effect in which characters and pictures are displayed by the light guide plate may be increased. In addition, the present invention is not limited to the production of a character and a light guide plate, but also includes a control for outputting a predetermined sound, a movable member and a stick controller 3.
By performing an effect including a control for vibrating the 1A and a control for causing a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED to emit light in a predetermined mode, the player's attention is directed to another, an initial appearance effect, a suggestion effect before the game, and a game. The visibility of the middle suggestion effect may be reduced (or made less noticeable).

  Further, in addition to the setting suggestion effect of the feature unit 112IW, a simultaneous effect performed based on a measurement result (a measurement result using a measurement timer or a real-time clock set at power-on) is performed in a specific mode. , The setting may be suggested.

  In addition, a setting suggestion effect (for example, a predetermined image) suggesting a setting is made in accordance with the number of times the variable display is executed continuously without the hold memory becoming 0 and the number of start winnings exceeding the upper limit hold memory number. Display control, output control of a predetermined sound, light emission control of a predetermined lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  Further, based on the detection of the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B during the predetermined operation valid period, a setting suggestion effect (for example, display control of a predetermined image, output control of a predetermined sound, predetermined control (Light emission control of a lamp, etc.) may be executed.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 112IW has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to that shown in the present example, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention, the present invention will be described. included.

As described above, the present invention 112IW includes the following first invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine that is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation and is capable of executing an advantageous state control based on the set value that has been set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 discloses that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and a setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command is transmitted. It describes that three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed based on the values. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is rather reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the first invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a set value “1” to a set value “3”) based on a setting operation 112IWS005 to S010).
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
An information output unit (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set; ,
Based on the set value information output from the information output means, suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control effect, for example, suggestion effect before game, suggestion effect during game, suggestion effect during big hit) Steps 112 IWS 409 to S 415 and S 50 in CPU 120
4 to S509 and a part for executing S601 to S606).
When the set value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the suggestion effect execution unit is set to a predetermined set value having a low degree of advantage for a player among the set values of the plurality of stages. In other words, the suggestion effect can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 112 IWS 412, S507, and S604).
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value is prevented from reducing the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the first invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 112 IWS011 and S108 to transmit the set value command at power-on and at the start of the change. Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a big hit during the fourth effect mode) in which the set value of the set value is high. Suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a suggestion effect during big hit) in which the set value of the set value is low in specificity can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance a staging effect.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the first invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a suggestion effect determination table before game, a suggestion effect determination table during game, a suggestion effect determination table during jackpot) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined. A suggestion effect determining means (for example, a portion for executing steps 112 IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120);
The suggestion effect determination means,
Using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602 are executed based on the set value of
When the set value information is not input normally, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined using the determination data corresponding to a predetermined set value (for example, the set value “1”) (for example, the effect control CPU 120). Executes steps 112 IWS 412, S 507, and S 604 based on the set value “1”.
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in data capacity can be prevented.

  Note that, in the present feature unit 112IW, "determining the execution mode of the suggested effect" is a concept including not only determining whether or not to execute the suggested effect but also determining the effect mode of the suggested effect. is there.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, It is described that it is possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and plays the game from an early time zone. Motivation to play can be given, and entertainment interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed 30 times after the change display is performed)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notifying unit (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) that can inform information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the first invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect or the like that the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) by the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted; see FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is described that the information processing apparatus may further be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the first invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined informing means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be further provided with a difficult-to-become character effect, light guide plate effect, error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the first invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a jackpot game, an interval period, an ending period, and the like) differs depending on a set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 11 of the first invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, the present invention 112IW includes the second invention described below. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine that is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation and is capable of executing an advantageous state control based on the set value that has been set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 discloses that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and a setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command is transmitted. It describes that three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed based on the values. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is rather reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the second invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a set value “1” to a set value “3”) based on a setting operation 112IWS005 to S010).
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
An information output unit (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set; ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) (Steps for executing steps 112 IWS 409 to S 415, S 504 to S 509, and S 601 to S 606) in the CPU 120.
The suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the suggestion effect when the setting value information output from the information output means is not normal. (If N is N in S605, the suggestion effect before the game, the suggestion effect during the game, and the suggestion effect during the big hit are not executed.)
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value is prevented from reducing the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the second invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 112 IWS011 and S108 to transmit the set value command at power-on and at the start of the change. Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a big hit during the fourth effect mode) in which the set value of the set value is high. Suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a suggestion effect during big hit) in which the set value of the set value is low in specificity can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance a staging effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, It is described that it is possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and plays the game from an early time zone. Motivation to play can be given, and entertainment interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed 30 times after the change display is performed)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notifying unit (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) that can inform information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the second invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect or the like that the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) by the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted; see FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is described that the information processing apparatus may further be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the second invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined informing means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be further provided with a difficult-to-become character effect, light guide plate effect, error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the second invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a jackpot game, an interval period, an ending period, and the like) differs depending on a set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the second invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, the present invention 112IW includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, a pachinko machine that is configured to be able to be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting operation and is capable of executing an advantageous state control based on the set value that has been set. As a gaming machine, for example, there is one described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 discloses that a change stop command (set value designation command) corresponding to a set value before and after a change is transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board, and a setting before and after the change obtained by the change stop command is transmitted. It describes that three types of effect patterns corresponding to three types of characters, giraffe, elephant, and lion, are displayed based on the values. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a possibility that an incorrect suggestion effect may be executed when the setting value information (setting value designation command) is not normal. In a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is rather reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the third invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
A setting means (for example, a step in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of setting any one of a plurality of set values (for example, a set value “1” to a set value “3”) based on a setting operation 112IWS005 to S010).
Game control means (for example, a part for executing steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
An information output unit (for example, a part that executes steps 112IWS011, S108 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of outputting set value information (for example, a set value command) capable of specifying which set value is set; ,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, for effect control) (Steps for executing steps 112 IWS 409 to S 415, S 504 to S 509, and S 601 to S 606) in the CPU 120.
The suggestion effect execution means,
As the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game or a suggestion effect during a game in the third effect mode, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the fourth effect mode) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a game in the first effect mode) Previous suggestions, suggestions during games, suggestions during big hits)
When the setting value information output from the information output unit is not normal, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect (for example, By performing steps 112 IWS 414, S509, and S606, effect control CPU 120 does not execute the pre-game suggestion effect, the in-game suggestion effect in the third effect mode, or the big hit suggestion effect in the fourth effect mode.
According to this feature, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute the control of the advantageous state based on the set value is prevented from reducing the interest in the game. be able to.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the third invention,
The information output means can output the set value information at a plurality of timings (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the steps 112 IWS011 and S108 to transmit the set value command at power-on and at the start of the change. Do)
According to such a configuration, even if the set value information cannot be normally input at a certain timing, the set value information can be normally input at the next timing. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, as the suggestion effect, a first suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a big hit during the fourth effect mode) in which the set value of the set value is high. Suggestion effect) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect before game, a suggestion effect during game, or a suggestion effect during big hit) in which the set value of the set value is low in specificity can be executed. It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance a staging effect.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the third invention,
Using a plurality of types of decision data (for example, a suggestion effect determination table before game, a suggestion effect determination table during game, a suggestion effect determination table during jackpot) for determining the execution mode of the suggestion effect, the execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined. A suggestion effect determining means (for example, a portion for executing steps 112 IWS410, S412, S414, S505, S507, S509, S602, S604, S606 in the effect control CPU 120);
The suggestion effect determination means,
Using the decision data corresponding to the set value set among the plurality of types of decision data, the execution mode of the suggested effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 122). Steps 112 IWS410, S505, and S602 are executed based on the set value of
If the set value information is not correctly input, using dedicated decision data (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect determination table for effect mode C, a suggestion effect determination table during game, a suggestion effect determination table during jackpot), The execution mode of the suggestion effect is determined (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the pre-game suggestion effect determination table for the effect mode C, the suggestion effect determination table during game, and the suggestion effect determination table during the jackpot to determine the step 112IWS414. , S509, and S606)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, indicates a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect, It is described that it is possible to execute an initial appearance effect, etc., and according to such a configuration, the player is interested in the state of the gaming machine before the start of the game and plays the game from an early time zone. Motivation to play can be given, and entertainment interest can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is set at least during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed 30 times after the change display is performed)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggestion effect can be executed at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to give a motivation to play a game during a predetermined period, and it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
It is described that a notifying unit (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) that can inform information on the executed suggested effect may be further provided. According to such a configuration, It is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the entertainment of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the third invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect or the like that the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) by the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
Limiting means for restricting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted; see FIG. 20-23 (D)). It is described that the information processing apparatus may further be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the third invention,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate depending on the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined informing means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. It is described that it may be further provided with a difficult-to-become character effect, light guide plate effect, error display, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the third invention,
A predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a jackpot game, an interval period, an ending period, and the like) differs depending on a set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 11 of the third invention,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

  In addition, in this characteristic part 112IW, it is comprised so that it can be changed to three types of production modes A to C. When the production mode A is controlled, if the set value information is not input normally, Assuming that the suggested effect is set to a predetermined set value with a low degree of advantage for the player, the suggested effect is configured to be executable (the configuration of the first invention described above). When the information is not input normally, the configuration of the suggestion effect is limited (the configuration of the second invention), and when the effect mode C is controlled, the set value information is input normally. If not, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect is configured to be executable as the suggestion effect (the configuration of the third invention described above). I can't. For example, it may be switched which of the control methods of the first to third inventions described above performs the suggested effect according to the game state. In this case, for example, if the game state is the normal state, if the set value information is not correctly input, it is possible to execute the suggestion effect as if it is set to a predetermined value with a low degree of advantage for the player. In the configuration (the configuration of the first invention), if the game state is the time saving state, the execution of the suggestion effect is restricted if the setting value information is not input normally (the configuration of the second invention) If the game state is a probable change state, the first suggestion effect is not executed as the suggestion effect, and the second suggestion effect can be executed as the suggestion effect if the set value information is not input normally. The configuration of the third invention described above).

  Further, it is not necessary to configure the suggestion effect to be executable by all the control methods of the first invention to the third invention described above, and the suggestion effect is configured to be executable using only one control method. Is also good.

  Further, in the case where the setting value command itself cannot be received due to a missing data or garbled data, the feature unit 112IW controls the execution of the suggestion effect by the control method of the first to third inventions described above (suggestion). Although the effect is limited), the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the set value command is received, the suggested effect may be limited when the received set value command is inconsistent. In this case, for example, every time a set value command is received, the effect control means stores the set value indicated by the received set value command, and then, when a new set value command is received, When the set value indicated by the received set value command does not match the previously stored set value, it is determined that inconsistency has occurred, and the execution of the suggestion effect is performed by the control methods of the first to third inventions. The control may be performed (the suggestion effect is limited).

  Further, the way of making the game different at each of the set values “1” to “3” is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, in the case of a set value of an odd number such as a set value “1” or “3”, when a consecutive villa (a large hit occurs continuously during a probable change state or the like) is likely to occur, and a consecutive villa occurs. It is configured so that the difference from the time when it is difficult is large, and in the case of a set value of an even number such as a set value "2", the likelihood of the occurrence of the extended house is relatively constant and does not change. A suggestion effect that indicates an odd number may be configured to be executable. In this case, if the set value command is not normally received, the control method according to the first to third aspects of the present invention controls execution of a suggestion effect indicating that the set value is an odd number. (Restricting suggested effects).

In addition, the present invention 112IW includes the following fourth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the suggestion of the set value is performed only during the variable display, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means, at least during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, has a suggestion effect (for example, a pre-game suggestion effect) with a different ratio according to the set value set. And initial presentation effects) can be executed. According to this feature, the player can be interested in the state of the gaming machine before the game starts, Motivation to perform, and enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the fourth invention,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of effect identification information (eg, effect symbols),
The suggestion effect execution means, during a period from when the set value is changed to when the first variable display is executed, a suggestion effect in which different effect identification information is displayed according to the set value set (for example, It is described that it is possible to execute the odd numbered initial appearance), and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 3 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect according to the set value when power supply to the game machine is restored after power supply to the game machine is stopped (for example, FIG. 20). (As shown in -19 (A) and (B), a pre-game suggestive effect determination table having different determination values is used.)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the fourth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a specific suggestion effect (for example, a suggestion effect during a game or a suggestion effect during a big hit) suggesting a set value after the variable display is started,
It is described that the specific suggestion effect may have a higher reliability for the set value suggested than the suggestion effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the fourth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. X, a portion that can display the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the present invention 112IW includes the following fifth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that motivation for playing the game cannot be effectively given, and the interest cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to perform at least a setting during a game until a predetermined period (for example, a special period (after the setting change is performed and the variable display is executed 30 times)) elapses after the setting value is changed. The suggested effects can be executed at different ratios according to the set values (for example, see FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B), and FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, motivation to play a game for a predetermined period can be given, and amusement of a game can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the fifth invention,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern,
Variable display execution means for performing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns at a different ratio between when the set value is changed and when the set value is not changed (for example, as shown in FIG. B)),
It is described that the variable display execution unit may be configured to be able to execute variable display using a common background image when a set value is changed and when the set value is not changed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the fifth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern,
Variable display execution means for performing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of the plurality of variable display patterns at different ratios when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. (See, for example, FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B)).
The variable display execution means can execute variable display using a common background image when the setting value is set to the first setting value and when the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 4 of the fifth invention,
The suggestion effect execution means determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied within a predetermined time period (for example, a big hit in a specific time period, that the number of executions of a reach effect or a pseudo continuous effect has reached a predetermined number of times, a specific super reach effect And a suggestion effect can be executed based on the execution of a notice effect (for example, when a jackpot occurs within a specific period, a suggestion effect during a jackpot can be executed. (See A) and (B))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the fifth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion where the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the present invention 112IW includes the following sixth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 has a problem that suggestive effects executed in the past cannot be confirmed, and the entertainment cannot be sufficiently enhanced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different rate according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20-21 (A) and (B)).
A gaming machine further comprising a notifying means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416) capable of notifying information on the executed suggestive effect is described. In this way, it is possible to confirm the suggestive effects executed in the past, and to enhance the game entertainment.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the sixth invention,
The notifying unit can notify the number of times the suggested effect has been executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notifying means can notify the content of the executed suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the sixth invention,
The notifying unit can notify information on the executed suggestion effect while waiting for the customer in which the variable display is not executed (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step S112IWS416).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the entertainment interest of the game.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the sixth invention,
Information generating means for generating information (for example, execution history information) related to the executed suggestion effect;
Image generation means for generating a specific image (for example, a two-dimensional code including execution history information) from which the information can be read by an imaging device;
The display device (for example, the image display device 5) for displaying the specific image in a form capable of being picked up by the image pickup device may be provided. Can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the sixth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion where the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the present invention 112IW includes the following seventh invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that if the setting suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize due to another effect, the interest may be reduced. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the seventh invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
A suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting the set value,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect at a different ratio according to the set value (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined effect (for example, a character effect or the like that the jackpot suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect) by the effect mode in which the suggestion effect becomes difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the suggestion effect Predetermined light effect execution means capable of executing light guide plate effect, error display, etc.)
A limiting means for limiting the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed, the execution of the accessory effect is restricted. FIGS. 20 to 23) (See (D))
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described, and according to this feature, a decrease in interest can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the seventh invention,
The limiting means changes the execution timing of at least one of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect when the execution timing of the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect overlap (for example, executing one of them during the fanfare period and ending the other with the ending Change it to run during the period)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the seventh invention,
The limiting unit prohibits the execution of the predetermined effect when the suggestion effect is executed (for example, the execution of the character effect effect is prohibited when the suggestion effect during the big hit is executed. See FIG. 20D). )
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the seventh invention,
When the suggestion effect is executed, the limiting unit executes the predetermined effect in an effect mode in which the suggestion effect is not easily recognized (for example, the movable member 112IW101 is operated in an operation mode different from a normal operation mode (for example, during a big hit). Control so that it does not stop at the position where it overlaps the dialogue image produced by the effect)))
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a gaming machine of the means 5 of the seventh invention,
Both the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect (for example, a fanfare effect for displaying a predetermined image on the image display device 5) include a display on one display unit (for example, the image display device 5).
It is described that the one display means may display a display related to the suggested effect prior to a display related to the predetermined effect. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest. it can.

Further, as a gaming machine of the means 6 of the seventh invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion where the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the present invention 112IW includes the following eighth invention. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the setting suggestive effect that is not preferable for the player is executed, which may lower the interest. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the eighth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value;
Setting suggestion execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion (for example, setting suggestion effect) suggesting a set value,
The setting suggestion executing means can execute the setting suggestion at a different rate according to the set value that is set (for example, see FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)).
A predetermined notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification in a mode in which the setting suggestion is difficult to recognize when executed in parallel with the setting suggestion (for example, when executed in parallel with the jackpot suggestion effect, the jackpot suggestion effect is recognized. A gaming machine is further provided with a hard-to-find role-playing effect, a light guide plate effect, an error display, and the like. According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, character production) for operating the movable member (for example, the movable member 112IW101). According to such a configuration, The effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the eighth invention,
A light guide plate having a light-transmitting property capable of transmitting light (for example, a light guide plate 112IW103);
A light emitting body provided so that light can be incident from an end face of the light guide plate,
The light guide plate is provided with a reflection portion that reflects light that has entered the inside of the light guide plate from the end face of the light guide plate by the luminous body and emits the light to the front of the gaming machine,
The predetermined notification means is capable of executing predetermined notification (for example, a light guide plate effect) for emitting light from the reflector provided on the light guide plate to the front surface of the game machine by causing the light emitter to emit light. According to such a configuration, the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the eighth invention,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may be capable of executing predetermined notification for displaying an error. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify an error.

Further, as a game machine of the means 5 of the eighth invention,
The setting suggestion execution means includes a first setting suggestion indicating that the setting is set to the first setting value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the first effect mode. See FIGS. 20 to 23 (A) and (B)). A second setting suggestion (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit in the third effect mode, which indicates that the second effect value is set to a second setting value having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first setting value. A) and (B)).
The predetermined notification means can execute the predetermined notification at a higher rate when the first setting suggestion is executed than when the second setting suggestion is executed (for example, see FIG. 20E).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the eighth invention,
A setting suggestion setting unit capable of setting an execution ratio of setting suggestion is provided (for example, a setting screen is displayed after the power is turned on, and an operating unit such as a push button 31B or an operating unit such as a switch provided inside the gaming machine (management) Operable only by the user) so that the settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be changed)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the eighth invention,
A gaming machine for variably displaying identification information,
A variable display device capable of variably displaying the identification information by rotating a variable display member (for example, a drum-shaped or belt-shaped movable body) provided with the identification information,
The variable display device performs a specific operation in the variable display of the first identification information after the setting value is changed,
It is described that the predetermined notification means may execute the predetermined notification at a high rate in the first variable display of the identification information after the setting value is changed. Can be prevented from decreasing.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the eighth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion where the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

In addition, the feature portion 112IW includes a ninth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling may be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the ninth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare period during a big hit game, an interval period, an ending period, and the like) differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the ninth invention,
The fanfare control period in the advantageous state varies depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the ninth invention,
The interval control period in the advantageous state differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the ninth invention,
The ending control period in the advantageous state differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
A game value assigning means for assigning a game value based on the satisfaction of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value provided by the game value provision means to be larger than the first set value in the magnitude of the game value used in the game. A second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the occupying ratio increases, and
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (for example, FIGS. 20-5 (A) and (B)). reference)
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the ninth invention,
It is described that a suggestion effect executing means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating a set value (for example, a suggestion effect during a big hit) during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the ninth invention,
It is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing an effect,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a common effect (for example, a common fanfare effect, an interval effect, an ending effect, etc.) regardless of the set value during a predetermined control period in the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest in the predetermined control period in the advantageous state.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 8 of the ninth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period in the advantageous state may be set in advance according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, the gambling property becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 9 of the ninth invention,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a plurality of advantageous states,
The game control means can control one of a plurality of types of the advantageous states (for example, big hit types A to C) at different ratios based on the set value,
The predetermined control period in the advantageous state differs according to the type of the advantageous state (for example, see FIG. 20-5 (B)).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 10 of the ninth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion where the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

Further, the feature portion 112IW includes a tenth invention described below. That is, as a conventional pachinko gaming machine with a setting function, for example, there is a pachinko gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, there is a problem that the gambling may be too high when the setting is high. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the tenth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state or the like) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting value 1 to setting value 3);
Game control means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process control process shown in FIG. 5) capable of executing the control of the advantageous state based on the set value,
The predetermined control period (for example, fluctuation time) related to the variable display differs according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 2 of the tenth invention,
The variable display period differs depending on the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 3 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the period during which the display result of the variable display is displayed may be made different depending on the set value, and such a configuration may cause excessive gambling. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 4 of the tenth invention,
A gaming machine capable of playing a game using a gaming value,
A game value assigning means for assigning a game value based on the satisfaction of a specific condition;
The setting means sets the first set value (for example, set value 3) and the magnitude of the game value provided by the game value provision means to be larger than the first set value in the magnitude of the game value used in the game. A second setting value (for example, setting value 1) in which the occupying ratio increases, and
The predetermined control period for variable display is longer when set to the second set value than when set to the first set value (see, for example, FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 5 of the tenth invention,
It is described that the predetermined control period for the variable display may be set in advance according to the set value, and according to such a configuration, gambling becomes too high. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 6 of the tenth invention,
A variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern,
Variable display execution means for performing variable display based on the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determining means determines one of a plurality of variable display patterns having different variable display periods at different rates according to the set value (for example, see FIG. 20-7).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Furthermore, as a game machine of the means 7 of the tenth invention,
A game machine capable of playing using a game medium (for example, a game ball),
Based on the game medium entering a predetermined area (for example, the general winning opening 50A to the general winning opening 50D, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first big winning opening, the second big winning opening 712). A game value providing means for providing a game value (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the prize ball processing in S12);
Information display means (for example, a display monitor 112IW029) capable of displaying information related to the game value provided by the game value provision means,
The information display means can display the set value that has been set (for example, as shown in FIG. 20-12, a portion where the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base can be displayed on the display monitor 112IW029).
It is described that this may be done, and according to such a configuration, an increase in manufacturing cost can be suppressed.

  Note that the configuration shown by the characteristic portion 112IW can be appropriately combined with the configuration shown by another characteristic portion such as the characteristic portion 31AK to form a gaming machine. For example, when performing the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect indicated by the characteristic portion 112IW, a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, and the jackpot suggestion effect. At the same time, a title corresponding to the pre-game suggestion effect, the game suggestion effect, or the big hit suggestion effect may be configured to be notified in the same manner as the characteristic portion 31AK.

(Explanation about the characteristic portions 251F to 253F)
Next, the characteristic portions 251F to 253F will be described. The characteristic portion 251F has a feature relating to a setting suggestion effect corresponding to a jackpot type B described later, and the characteristic portion 252F and the characteristic portion 253F have a characteristic relating to a setting suggestion effect corresponding to a jackpot type D described later.

(About specifications)
FIG. 21A is a diagram for explaining a specification and a big hit type table for each set value. 21-1 (A) is a table showing specifications at each set value, FIG. 21-1 (B) is a first special symbol big hit type table A used in the feature portion 251F, and FIG. 21-1 (C) is The first special symbol big hit type table B used in the characteristic portions 252F and 253F, and FIG. 21C is a diagram showing a second special symbol big hit type table used in the characteristic portions 251F to 253F.

  Here, in the characteristic portion 251F to the characteristic portion 253F, a first start winning opening is provided in a path in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the left side (left-handed) in the game area of the game board 2. The second starting winning opening is provided in a path in which the game ball can flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side (right-handed) of the game area of the game board 2. In the characteristic units 251F to 253F, a left-handed shot is aimed at a first starting winning opening for starting a first special symbol game at a low base, and a second special symbol game is started at a high base. To the right of the second starting winning port to win.

  Due to such gaming characteristics, the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (B) is used when the player hits the left, and the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (D) is used when the player hits the right. As for the characteristic portions 252F and 253F, the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (C) is used when hitting left, and the table shown in FIG. 21-1 (D) is used when hitting right. It should be noted that the specifications at the respective set values in the characteristic portions 251F to 253F are common. The details of each table will be described below.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change is 1/319, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change is 1/95, and the ST continuation rate is 65.29%. In setting 2, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change is 1/280, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change is 1/75, and the ST continuation rate is 73.87%. In setting 3, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change is 1/250, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change is 1/60, and the ST continuation rate is 81.37%. Here, the ST continuation rate indicates a probability that the ST state continues. The ST state is a state in which the state is controlled to be in the certainty change state after the big hit game state and the certainty change state is continued until the predetermined number of special figure games are executed. In the characteristic portions 251F to 253F, ST continues 100 times after the big hit game state.

By setting the data shown in FIG. 21A, in the case of setting 1, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change, and the ST continuation rate are the lowest among the set values. I have. On the other hand, in the case of the setting 3, the jackpot probability at the time of non-probable change, the jackpot probability at the time of probable change, and the ST continuation rate are the highest among the set values. Therefore, the relationship of setting 1 <setting 2 <setting 3 is advantageous to the player. The set value may be further provided in a plurality of stages, and may be provided, for example, in stages 1 to 6 so as to be advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 21-1 (B), the first special symbol big hit type table A used in the characteristic portion 251F includes three big hits of a big hit type A, a big hit type B, and a big hit type C. When a big hit is caused by the first special symbol, it is determined by using this table that any of the three big hits is a big hit.

  In the big hit type A, the fluctuation in which the gaming state after the big hit is based on the high probability and the high level is continued during the variable display of 100 times, and the determination ratio is 45%. For the big hit type B, the gaming state after the big hit is a high-accuracy high base. In the big hit B, the number of times of the high base differs depending on the game state before the big hit. Specifically, when the jackpot B is changed from the low-accuracy low base or the high-accuracy low base, the high-accuracy high base continues 50 times, and thereafter, the high-accuracy low base continues 50 times. When the jackpot B is changed from the high-precision high base, the high-precision high base continues 100 times. The determination ratio of the jackpot B is 20%. In the case of the big hit type C, the fluctuation in which the gaming state after the big hit becomes the low-probability base continues 100 times, and the determination ratio is 35%. It can be said that the ST state is after the end of the jackpot A and the jackpot B in which the high probability continues a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 21-1 (C), the first special symbol big hit type table B used in the characteristic portions 252F and 253F includes three big hits of a big hit type A, a big hit type D and a big hit type C. When a big hit is caused by the first special symbol, it is determined by using this table that any of the three big hits is a big hit.

  In the big hit type A, the fluctuation in which the gaming state after the big hit is based on the high probability and the high level is continued during the variable display of 100 times, and the determination ratio is 45%. In addition, in the jackpot type D, the game state after the jackpot is changed 100 times with high accuracy and low base, and the determination ratio is 20%. In the case of the big hit type C, the fluctuation in which the gaming state after the big hit becomes the low-probability base continues 100 times, and the determination ratio is 35%. It can be said that the state is the ST state after the end of the jackpot A and the jackpot D in which the high probability continues for a predetermined number of times.

  As shown in FIG. 21-1 (D), the second special symbol jackpot type table used in the feature units 251F to 253F includes a jackpot type A. When a big hit occurs due to the second special symbol, the big hit A is always determined. In the big hit type A, the fluctuation in which the gaming state after the big hit is based on the high probability and the high level is continued during the variable display of 100 times, and the determination ratio is 100%. It can be said that the ST state is after the end of the big hit A in which the high probability continues a predetermined number of times.

(About the flow of various effects of the characteristic part 251F to the characteristic part 253F)
FIG. 21B is a timing chart showing the flow of various effects. FIG. 21-2 (A) shows a flow of the effect when the big hit B occurs in the characteristic portion 251F. FIG. 21B shows the flow of the effect when the big hit D occurs in the feature portions 252F and 253F. FIG. 21-2 (C) shows the flow of the effect when the jackpot A or the jackpot C is reached in the characteristic portions 251F to 253F.

First, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), when the hit state B changes from the normal state as the low-accuracy low-base state to the big hit B in the characteristic portion 251F, the high-accuracy high base continues as a specific period for 50 times. I do. After that, 30 times out of the 50 times of the high-probability low-base period as the predetermined period are set as the setting suggestive effect existence period. Further, thereafter, the remaining 20 periods of the high-accuracy low base are set as the setting suggestion effect-free period. In the setting suggestion effect existence period, an effect in which a telop indicating that the period is the setting suggestion effect is added to the screen of the image display device 5 is also executed. The display of this telop disappears when the setting suggestive effect existence period ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (B), when the big hit D is controlled again in the high accuracy low base state after the big hit is controlled in the characteristic portions 252F and 253F, the big hit D ending period , A setting suggestion effect is executed at an appearance rate of 80%. As described above, the setting suggestion effect may be executed by repeatedly executing the big hit D in the feature units 252F and 253F. An ending period in which the setting suggestion effect may be executed is set as the setting suggestion effect period. Further, thereafter, when the jackpot D is won in the high-accuracy low base state, the setting suggestion effect is executed at an appearance rate of 90% in an ending period (setting suggestion effect period) after the end of the jackpot D. As described above, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect increases as the big hit D is repeated. Although the illustration of the ending period in the first big hit D is omitted, a setting suggestion effect may be executed in the first ending period of the big hit D.

  Next, a case where the control is set to the big hit A or the big hit C in the characteristic portions 251F to 253F shown in FIG. When controlled to the big hit A, the high-accuracy high base continues 100 times, and when controlled to the big hit C, the low-precision high base continues 100 times. However, the execution period of the setting suggestion effect is not defined for any of the jackpots, and the setting suggestion effect is not executed even if the state after the end of the jackpot or the repeated jackpot is won.

(About the setting suggestion effect performed in the feature unit 251F)
Next, a setting suggestion effect performed in the characteristic portion 251F will be described. FIG. 21C is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 21C illustrates a state in which the setting suggestion effect for the big hit B illustrated in FIG. As shown in FIG. 21-3 (A), when the high-accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit B is executed 20 times, the remaining number display indicating the remaining fluctuation number of ST is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5. 251F001 is displayed. The remaining number display decreases by one each time the variable display is executed once.

  After that, after the variable display is performed 50 times from the end of the big hit B, a setting suggestion effect existence period is set as shown in FIG. 21-3 (B). In the setting suggestive effect existence period, the remaining number display 251F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of ST is displayed as “50 remaining”. In addition, a telop image 251F002 in which characters of “setting suggestion chance!” Are displayed at the lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. The characters displayed in the telop image 251F002 move from the right to the left over time. Also, a character image 251F003 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a dialogue image 251F005 of "Please press a button" is displayed from the character image 251F003. Also, a button image 251F004 that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed from the center left of the screen.

  When the setting suggestion effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 21C, when the player operates the push button 31B during the valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the question "What about?" A line image 251F006 is displayed. Since the dialogue image 251F006 of "What is it?" Is not a display suggesting a set value, the player cannot know which set value is set. Instead of displaying characters, a symbol such as “x” may be displayed.

Then, even after the variable display 77 times from the end of the big hit B, as shown in FIG. In the setting suggestive effect existence period, the remaining number display 251F001 indicating the remaining number of fluctuations of ST is displayed as "23 times remaining". In addition, a telop image 251 </ b> F in which characters “setting suggestion chance!” Is displayed at the lower part on the screen of the image display device 5.
002 is displayed. Also, from the character image 251F003, a dialogue image 251F005 of "Please press a button" is displayed as in FIG. 21-3 (B). Also, a button image 251F004 that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B is displayed from the center left of the screen.

  When the setting suggestion effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 21-3 (E), when the player operates the push button 31B during the effective period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the “high setting expectation degree is high. !! ”is displayed. The dialogue image 251F007 of “High setting expectation degree is high” is a display indicating that there is a high possibility that the current setting value is the high setting.

  Thereafter, after the period of setting suggestion effect corresponding to the variable display of 50 to 80 times from the end of the big hit B, the period of no setting suggestion effect is provided for the remaining 20 variable display times. FIG. 21-3 (F) shows the time when the number of rotations of the remaining ST of the 93rd time from the end of the big hit B is 7 times. Since the remaining number of times is less than 20 rotations, no image related to the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, regarding the variable display after the 50th rotation when the game state changes from the high-accuracy high base to the high-accuracy low base, up to the 100th rotation when the high-precision low base ends, the setting suggestive effect period is set. Is also good.

  FIG. 21D is an explanatory diagram of the setting suggestion effect determination table. The setting suggestion effect determination table is a table used in the setting suggestion effect process when the big hit B is won at a rotation speed of 70 rotations or less after the 50th rotation after the end of the big hit B. Also, in FIG. 21-4, three tables are provided, but different tables are used depending on the number of wins of the jackpot B at the number of rotations of 70th rotation or less after the 50th rotation after the end of the jackpot B. .

  FIG. 21-4 (A) is a diagram illustrating a first setting suggestion effect determination table used when the big hit B is won once in the high-probability low base state after the big hit B ends. FIG. 21-4 (B) is a diagram illustrating a second setting suggestion effect determination table used when winning is performed twice after the jackpot B in the high-accuracy low base state after the jackpot B ends. FIG. 21-4 (C) is a diagram showing a third setting suggestion effect determination table used when three or more wins are made after the big hit B in the high-probability low base state after the big hit B ends. Using these tables, the content of the words of the character executed in the setting suggestion effect corresponding to the setting value is determined. These setting suggestion effect determination tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  As shown in the first setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-4 (A), in setting 1 at the first time of the big hit B, the ratio determined as “how about?” Is 88%, and “high setting expectation degree is low!” Is determined to be 5%, the percentage determined to be "highly set expectation medium!" Is 4%, the percentage determined to be "highly set expectation high!" Is 3%, and "high setting expected!" Is not determined (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined as “What about?” Is 88%, the ratio determined as “High setting expectation low!” Is 3%, and the ratio determined as “High setting expectation medium!” 5%, the ratio determined as “high setting expectation degree!” Is 4%, and there is no ratio determined as “high setting expected!” (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined as “what about?” Is 87%, the ratio determined as “high setting expectation low!” Is 3%, and the ratio determined as “high setting expectation medium!” 4%, the ratio determined as “high setting expectation degree!” Is 5%, and the ratio determined as “high setting expected!” Is 1%.

As shown in the second setting suggestion effect determination table in FIG. 21-4 (B), in setting 1 at the second big hit B, the percentage determined as “what about?” Is 73%, and “high setting expectation degree is low!” 10%, 9% for "high setting expected!", 8% for "high setting expected!", And "high setting confirmed!" Is not determined (0%). In setting 2, the percentage determined as "what about?" Is 73%, and "high setting expectation is low!"
Is 8%, 10% is determined as "High setting expected!", 9% is determined as "High setting expected!", And "High setting confirmed!" No percentage is determined (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined as “what about?” Is 67%, the ratio determined as “high setting expectation low!” Is 8%, and the ratio determined as “high setting expectation medium!” 9%, the ratio determined as “high setting expectation degree is high!” Is 10%, and the ratio determined as “high setting expected!” Is 6%.

  As shown in the third setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-4 (C), in setting 1 for the third or more big hits, the ratio determined as “how about?” Is 58%, and “high setting expectation degree is low”. "!" Is 15%, "High setting expected degree is medium!" Is 14%, "High setting expected degree is high" is 13%, and "High setting expected!" Is not determined (0%). In the setting 2, the rate determined as “what about?” Is 58%, the rate determined as “high setting expectation low!” Is 13%, and the rate determined as “high setting expectation medium!” 15%, the ratio determined as “high setting expectation degree is high!” Is 14%, and the ratio determined as “high setting expected!” Is 0%. In the setting 3, the ratio determined as "what is it?" Is 47%, the ratio determined as "high setting expectation low!" Is 13%, and the ratio determined as "high setting expectation medium!" The rate determined as 14%, "high setting expectation degree!" Is 15%, and the rate determined as "high setting expected!" Is 11%.

  According to the setting of the data shown in FIG. 21-4, in the setting suggestion effect processing, the ratio of the dialog content excluding “high setting confirmed!” However, there are many situations where the setting value is not suggested. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the ratio selected as the content of the line to be executed is “high setting expectation degree low!” "High setting expectation medium!"> "High setting expectation high!" In the case of the setting 2, “high setting expectation medium!”> “High setting expectation high!”> “High setting expectation low!” In the case of the setting 3, “high setting expectation degree is high!”> “High setting expectation degree is medium!”> “High setting expectation degree is low!”. That is, since the appearance rate of the dialogue differs depending on the set value, it is possible to suggest the set value from the content of the dialogue. In addition, since “high setting finalized!” Appears only in the most advantageous setting 3, the setting ratio of “high setting finalized!” Is the lowest, but when it appears, the setting 3 is the high setting. Determine. It should be noted that any character may be displayed at a rate of 100% without being determined as “how about?”.

  Further, by setting the data shown in FIG. 21-4, in the setting suggestion effect processing, the more the number of big hits B, the easier it is to display the content of the suggestion of the setting value, and the higher the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect. Also, as the number of big hits B increases, the line of “high setting fixed!”, Which determines that the high setting is set, is more likely to be displayed. You can see the effect of

  FIG. 21-4 is merely an example, and any setting suggestion effect other than the content of the dialogue indicating a specific setting value may be executed. For example, characters that suggest setting values such as “may be good” or “lucky!” May be displayed. The setting value may be suggested by displaying any one of the plurality of characters.

  FIG. 21-5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect process. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the variable display effect process (S172).

First, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting-suggested flag is set (251FS001). If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion flag is not set (N in 251FS001), the process proceeds to 251FS002.
On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion flag is set (Y in 251FS001), the process ends.

  In 251FS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is in the high probability state after the end of the big hit B. Whether or not the state is the high probability state after the end of the big hit B is determined based on a command sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 for designating the progress of the game and the like. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the state is the high probability state after the end of the big hit B (Y in 251FS002), the process proceeds to 251FS003. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the state is not the high probability state after the end of the big hit B (N in 251FS002), the process ends.

  In 251FS003, the effect control CPU 120 checks the number of times stored in the fluctuation number counter that counts the number of times of variable display after the end of the big hit to determine whether the value of the fluctuation number counter is more than 50 and 80 or less. Determine whether or not. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the variation counter is more than 50 and not more than 80 (Y in 251FS003), the process proceeds to 251FS004. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the fluctuation number counter is equal to or smaller than 20 or larger than 50 (N in 251FS003), the process ends.

  In 251FS004, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation valid period is a period in which a player's pressing operation on push button 31B can be effectively detected. Whether or not the operation is valid is determined by checking the value of a timer that measures the validity period. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is during the operation valid period (Y in 251FS004), the process proceeds to 251FS005. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not during the operation valid period (N in 251FS004), the process ends.

  In 251FS005, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an operation of pressing the push button 31B by the player has been detected. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that an operation has been detected (Y in 251FS005), the dialog content in the setting suggestion effect is determined by a setting suggestion effect determination table according to the number of jackpots B and the set value, It is displayed (251FS006). Next, effect control CPU 120 sets the setting suggestion flag (251FS007), and ends the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that no operation has been detected (N in 251FS005), the process ends.

(About the setting suggestion effect performed in the characteristic part 252F and the characteristic part 253F)
Next, a setting suggestion effect performed in the characteristic unit 252F and the characteristic unit 253F will be described. FIG. 21-6 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect operation of the setting suggestion effect. FIG. 21-6 shows a state where the setting suggestion effect for the big hit D shown in FIG. 21-2 (B) is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (A), when the jackpot D is won again during the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the jackpot D (the first large-hit jackpot D in the high-accuracy low base), the image display device 5 An effect indicating that the big hit D has occurred is executed.

  Next, during the ending period of the big hit D, a setting suggestion effect using the push button 31B is executed. As shown in FIG. 21-6 (B), in the setting suggestion effect, a button image 252F001 is displayed at the center of the screen. FIG. 21C is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect has not been performed. As shown in FIG. 21C, when a pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is selected or when the push button 31B is not operated, the setting suggestion effect is not executed and “×” is displayed on the screen. "Is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21D, when the jackpot D is won during the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the jackpot D (the second large-hit jackpot D in the high-accuracy low base), the image display device 5 In which the big hit D is indicated. Then, as shown in FIG. 21E, in the setting suggestion effect, the button image 252F001 is displayed at the center of the screen, as in the case of the first big hit D after the big hit D. FIG. 21F is a diagram illustrating a case where the setting suggestion effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 21D, when the pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character A image 252F003 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21-6 (G), when the jackpot D is won during the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the jackpot D (the third large-hit jackpot in the high-accuracy low base), the image display device is displayed. An effect indicating that the jackpot D has been reached in 5 is executed. Then, the button image 252F001 is displayed at the center of the screen as in the case of the first and second hits after the hit D. Then, as shown in FIG. 21H, when a pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is executed is selected and the player operates the push button 31B, the character C image 252F004 is displayed on the screen as the setting suggestion effect. Will be displayed.

  FIG. 21-7 is a diagram illustrating a setting suggestion effect determination table. FIG. 21-7 (A) is a jackpot D continuation first setting suggestion effect determination table, FIG. 21-7 (B) is a jackpot D continuation second suggestion effect determination table, and FIG. 21-7 (C) is a jackpot D The continuation 3rd setting suggestion effect determination table is shown. These tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The jackpot D continuation first setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-7 (A) is a setting suggestion effect process in the setting suggestion effect process when the jackpot D is won again in the high-accuracy low base state after the end of the jackpot D. This is a table used to determine whether or not to execute, and if so, which setting suggestive effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to execute. In the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 20%, the ratio determined by the character A is 28%, the ratio determined by the character B is 27%, the ratio determined by the character C is 25%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined without the effect is 20%, the ratio determined by the character A is 25%, the ratio determined by the character B is 28%, the ratio determined by the character C is 27%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined without the effect is 20%, the ratio determined for the character A is 25%, the ratio determined for the character B is 26%, the ratio determined for the character C is 27%, and the character D is determined. Is 2%.

  The jackpot D continuation second setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-7 (B) is a setting suggestion effect process when the jackpot D is successively won twice in the high-accuracy low base state after the end of the jackpot D. This table is used to determine whether or not a setting suggestion effect is to be performed, and to determine which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C, or character D) to execute. In the setting 1, the ratio determined without the effect is 10%, the ratio determined by the character A is 31%, the ratio determined by the character B is 30%, the ratio determined by the character C is 29%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 2, the ratio determined without the effect is 10%, the ratio determined by the character A is 29%, the ratio determined by the character B is 31%, the ratio determined by the character C is 30%, and the character D is determined. Is not determined (0%). In the setting 3, the ratio determined without the effect is 10%, the ratio determined by the character A is 27%, the ratio determined by the character B is 28%, the ratio determined by the character C is 30%, and the character D is determined. Is 5%.

The setting suggestion effect determination table of FIG. 21-7 (C) for which the big hit D continuation is set to the third time or more is a setting suggestion effect process when the big hit D is won three or more times in the high-accuracy low base state after the end of the big hit D. Is a table used to determine whether or not a setting suggestion effect is to be performed and, if so, which setting suggestion effect (character A, character B, character C or character D) to execute. In the setting 1, there is no ratio determined without the effect (0%). The ratio determined for character A is 35%, the ratio determined for character B is 33%, the ratio determined for character C is 32%, and the ratio determined for character D is no (0%). . In the setting 2, there is no ratio determined without the effect (0%). The ratio determined for character A is 32%, the ratio determined for character B is 35%, the ratio determined for character C is 33%, and the ratio determined for character D is no (0%). . In the setting 3, there is no ratio determined without the effect (0%). The ratio determined for character A is 29%, the ratio determined for character B is 30%, the ratio determined for character C is 33%, and the ratio determined for character D is 8%.

  FIG. 21-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the setting suggestion effect process. The setting suggestion effect process is a process executed in the ending effect process (S177).

  First, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a big hit in the high-precision low base (252FS001). Whether or not a big hit in the high-precision low base is determined based on a command for designating a gaming state. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is a big hit during the high-accuracy low base (Y in 252FS001), the process proceeds to 252FS002. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is not a big hit during the high-accuracy low base (N in 252FS001), the process ends.

  In 252FS002, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 1. The big hit D continuation counter is a counter that increases each time the big hit D is won again in the highly accurate low base state after the big hit D ends. The counter may be reset by winning a jackpot other than the jackpot D. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 1 (Y in 252FS002), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is given by the big hit D continuation first setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. The contents are determined (252FS003), and the process proceeds to 252FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is not 1 (N in 252FS002), the process proceeds to 252FS004.

  In 252FS004, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 2. When the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is 2 (Y in 252FS004), the effect of the setting suggestion effect is given by the second big hit D continuation setting suggestion effect determination table according to the set value. The contents are determined (252FS005), and the process proceeds to 252FS007. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the value of the big hit D continuation counter is not 2 (when it is determined as 3 or more) (N in 252FS004), it sets the big hit D continuation third or more according to the set value. The effect contents of the setting suggestion effect are determined by the suggestion effect determination table (252FS006), and the process proceeds to 252FS007.

  In 252FS007, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect. If the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed (Y in 252FS007), the effect is set to execute the determined setting suggestion effect (252FS008), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the setting suggestion effect (N in 252FS007), the process ends.

(About the modification of the characteristic part)
Although the characteristic portions 251F to 253F have been described with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to the one shown in the present example, and even if there are changes and additions within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, Included in the invention. Hereinafter, modified examples of the characteristic portions 251F to 253F will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), at the time of the big hit B, 30 times of the high certainty low base period after the end of the 50 high accuracy high base states after the end of the big hit B are set as the setting suggestive effect existence period. Had been. Then, the 20 high-accuracy low-base periods after the end of the 30 high-accuracy low-base periods were non-setting suggestion effect periods. However, the 20 high-accuracy low-base periods after the 30 high-accuracy low-base periods may be set as the setting suggestive effect existence period. Further, a period of 50 times of the high-accuracy base immediately after the end of the big hit B may be set as the setting suggestive effect existence period. Further, the setting suggestion effect may not be executed during a plurality of variable display periods, but may be executed only once.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 21-5, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed for each variable display during the 30 high accuracy low base periods has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be performed only when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executable when the game is controlled to the big hit game state, which is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player during the 30 highly accurate low base periods. The setting suggestion effect may be performed during the ending period when the game is controlled to the big hit game state. In such a case, a button image may be displayed during the ending period, and when a motion of the player is detected, a setting suggestion effect may be executed using the table of FIG. 21-4. The setting suggestion effect may be executed during a round, or may be executed during the variable display of the variable display controlled to the big hit game state.

  In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during a fanfare period that is a period for notifying that a big hit is controlled at the start of the big hit or an interval period of a round during the big hit. Here, if the interval period is lengthened, it is possible to suppress the player from acquiring a large number of balls in a short period of time, but this will give the player a sense of extension of the effect. However, even if the interval period is lengthened, the feeling of delay can be reduced by executing the setting suggestion effect during the interval period. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest during the interval period and to prevent the shooting performance from becoming too high by acquiring a large number of payouts in a short time.

  In the present embodiment, during the high-accuracy high base, the game based on the second special figure is mainly played, and the second special figure is played preferentially over the first special figure. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during a predetermined period in which the variable display of the second special figure (for example, four variable displays) held when the high base is completed is executed. . In addition, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a predetermined period such as 30 rotations including the number of reservations of the second special map (4 rotations of the number of reservations + 26 rotations of the high-precision low base), or the number of reservations may be performed. The period of the setting suggestion effect may be different between the period (the period of 4 rotations corresponding to the number of reservations) and the other period (the period of the high-precision low base 26 rotations). Note that the setting suggestion effect may be executed even when there is a hold memory that becomes a big hit in the hold when the high base ends. In such a case, the setting suggestion effect performed in the variable display of the number of holds of the second special figure during the predetermined period, and the setting suggestion effect performed in the variable display of the first special figure in the high-precision low base state A setting suggestion effect of a different mode may be executed for the effect.

Also, as shown in FIG. 21-2 (A), the setting suggestion effect is performed during the variable display of the 30 high-accuracy low-base periods after the end of the 50 high-accuracy high-base states after the big hit B ends. The case of execution is described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be performed not during the variable display but during the customer waiting demonstration effect. As described above, when the demonstration is performed during the demonstration effect, the setting suggestion effect may be executed as one of the mini games by operating a predetermined operation unit such as the push button 31B. When the setting is performed during the demonstration, the setting suggestion may be performed based on the content of the moving image during the demonstration. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a period during which the starting winning is not executed despite the fact that the game ball is fired continues for a predetermined period. For example, the setting suggestion may be executed if a start winning has not occurred when one minute has elapsed after the detection of the launch of the game ball by the sensor that detects the launch of the game ball. As described above, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the predetermined condition is satisfied in a period other than during variable display.

  As illustrated in FIG. 21C, a case has been described in which the telop image 251F002 is displayed in the lower part of the screen during the setting suggestive effect presence period. However, the background may be switched during the setting suggestion effect presence period. Further, the setting suggestive effect existence period may be a combination of the background switching and the telop image 251F002.

  In the setting suggestion effect existence period, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the timing at which the setting suggestion effect is executed. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed at a higher rate immediately after the start of the setting suggestion effect period than immediately before the end of the setting suggestion effect period. Further, instead of the execution ratio being different, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be different.

  The setting suggestion effect became the jackpot B in the 30 high-accuracy low base periods after the 50 high-accuracy high base states were completed again without shifting to the jackpot A advantageous to the player after the end of the big hit B In this case, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than the first time. In this way, even if an unfavorable big hit continues, the disappointment of the player can be reduced by the setting suggestion effect. Further, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be increased as the number of times the disadvantageous jackpot continues is increased.

  As illustrated in FIG. 21-5, the case where the setting suggestion effect is not executed when the motion of the player is not detected has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed even when the operation of the player is not detected. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed after the operation valid period has elapsed. In such a case, a setting suggestion effect with lower reliability than when the action of the player is detected may be executed.

  The setting suggestion effect as shown in FIG. 21C may have a different execution ratio depending on whether or not the variable display is a big hit. For example, in the case of a variable display that is a big hit, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than that of a variable display that is a loss. In addition, a setting suggestion effect having a content whose execution ratio does not differ irrespective of whether it is a big hit or not may be provided.

  In the invention related to the characteristic portion 251F, it has been described that the setting suggestion effect is executed when the big hit B which is more disadvantageous for the player than the big hit A continues. After the jackpot B is completed, if the jackpot B is won again in the high-accuracy high base state, the most advantageous high-accuracy high base state 100 times is awarded. In this case, only the high-accuracy high-base state is given 50 times. However, since the setting suggestion effect is executed, the interest of the player can be improved even in the case of a disadvantageous big hit. Note that a setting suggestion effect period may be provided after the end of the big hit in a case where the big hit C which is the most disadvantageous for the player is won.

As shown in FIG. 21B, the case where the setting suggestion effect is executed in the characteristic portion 252F by performing the unfavorable big hit D for the player a plurality of times has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the big hit continues within the predetermined period regardless of the type of the big hit. Specifically, the setting suggestion effect may be executed on condition that one of the big hits is won during 100 fluctuations different from the normal state after the big hit end. Further, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when a big hit of the same type or a different type continues. Further, the execution ratio and the reliability of the setting suggestion effect may be different depending on the type of the big hit.

  In the characteristic part 252F and the characteristic part 253F, the setting suggestion effect may be executed in a period other than the big hit ending period. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed during the round, or may be executed during the variable display of the variable display controlled to the big hit gaming state.

  In FIG. 21-7, when the jackpot D has been continued three times or more, no effect is not selected. However, even if the big hit D continues a plurality of times, it may be possible to select that no effect is produced at a low rate. Further, there may be an effect executed at the same ratio regardless of the number of the big hits D.

  The setting suggestion effect may be executed for the big hit C shown in FIG. In such a case, there may be a setting suggestion effect of the content to be executed at a fixed rate in any state. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed for the big hit C, it is desirable to make the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect lower than that of the big hit D.

  The big hit D shown in FIG. 21-1 is a big hit in which a high-precision and low-base state is set after the big hit is completed, so that the starting winning is hard to occur and the player is disadvantageous. However, even if the big hits that the player feels disadvantageous continue, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the next big hit D can be expected to be won. The setting suggestion effect may be executed when the jackpot D is first won.

  The case where the character is displayed as the setting suggestion effect has been described. However, the setting suggestion effect may be indicated by changing the color of the background. In such a case, at the time of the high setting, the background image for determining the high setting may be displayed based on the disadvantageous jackpot a plurality of times.

  The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 transmits information on the set value as shown in step 112IWS031 in FIG. 20-9 and step 112IWS108 in FIG. 20-13. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect process based on the information regarding the set value. In such a case, if the set value command is not normal as the information on the set value, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a low-setting suggestion effect. In this way, it is possible to prevent a wrong setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of executions of the setting suggestion effect. In addition, without making a tentative decision (temporary setting) to execute the setting suggestion effect of the low setting, not executing only the pattern of the high setting finalization, and executing the setting suggestion effect selected by lottery from among them. May be performed. The setting suggestion effect may not be executed.

  Note that the controls in the above features may be applied in combination with each other. As a result, it is possible to suitably execute the effect regarding the setting suggestion.

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 251F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 251F includes the following invention relating to the above-described characteristic portion 251F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and that can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set set value. Was. In such a pachinko game machine, any one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information, and the set value is suggested according to the set value before and after the change of the set value. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). Further, there has been a gaming machine that is controlled to be in an advantageous state when controlled to be in an advantageous state during a specific period than when controlled to be in an advantageous state outside a specific period (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-66021). .

  However, when an effect that suggests a setting as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is executed on a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2002-66021, there is room for improvement in the timing of executing the effect that suggests the setting. Was. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 251F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player;
If the advantageous state is controlled within a specific period (for example, a period of 50 high-probability bases after the end of the big hit B), outside the specific period (for example, 50 high-probability bases after the end of the big hit B) A special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, 100 high-precision high bases) which is advantageous to the player at a higher rate than in the case of controlling to the advantageous state during the period of the high-probability low base after the end. (For example, CPU 103);
Setting suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (e.g., the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-3) that suggests the set value to the player;
The setting suggestion effect execution means is configured to perform the setting suggestion effect for a predetermined period after the end of the specific period (for example, a period of 30 setting high-probability effects after the end of 50 hits of the high-accuracy high base after the end of the big hit B). A setting suggestion effect can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, since the setting suggestion effect is executed in a predetermined period after the end of the specific period, attention can be paid to the execution timing of the effect indicating the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
Setting means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player;
If the advantageous state is controlled within a specific period (for example, a period of 50 high-probability bases after the end of the big hit B), outside the specific period (for example, 50 high-probability bases after the end of the big hit B) A special state control means capable of controlling to a special state (for example, 100 high-precision high bases) which is advantageous to the player at a higher rate than in the case of controlling to the advantageous state during the period of the high-probability low base after the end. (For example, CPU 103);
Setting suggestion effect execution means (eg, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (e.g., the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-3) that suggests the set value to the player;
The setting suggestion effect execution means is configured to perform the setting suggestion effect for a predetermined period after the end of the specific period (for example, a period of 30 setting high-probability effects after the end of 50 hits of the high-accuracy high base after the end of the big hit B). The setting suggestion effect can be executed when controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the game is controlled to the big hit game state during the setting suggestion effect existence period).

  According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect is executed when the state is controlled to the advantageous state for a predetermined period after the end of the specific period. The interest of the people is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The specific period is a period after the advantageous state ends (for example, the specific period is a period of 50 high-accuracy bases after the end of the big hit B).

  According to such a configuration, since the specific period starts after the advantageous state ends, interest is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The predetermined period is a period in which the variable display is performed at least a plurality of times (for example, the predetermined period is a setting suggestion effect of 30 high-accuracy low bases after 50 high-accuracy high bases after the big hit B ends) There is a period).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player even when the control is not performed in the advantageous state during the specific period.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
A predetermined-period notification effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a predetermined-time notification effect (for example, an effect of displaying the telop image 251F002) for notifying the player of the predetermined period is provided. .

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the period is the predetermined period.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
After being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) in the predetermined period (for example, a period with a setting suggestion effect), the predetermined period is again set without shifting to the special state (for example, a high-accuracy base state). In the case where the control state is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the big hit game state), the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect increases (for example, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion effect increases when the number of times of winning the disadvantageous jackpot is large). Become).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player who has not been repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state during the specific period.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
Further comprising operating means (for example, a push button 31B) operable by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

  According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value has been set (for example, CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 20-9, FIG. Step 112 IWS 108);
The setting suggestion effect execution means,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit (eg, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21-3),
When the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect execution unit sets a predetermined setting value having a low degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of setting values. (For example, if the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect as if it has been set to a low setting value). Is possible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an incorrect setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 252F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 252F includes the following invention relating to the above-described characteristic portion 252F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and that can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set set value. Was. In such a pachinko game machine, any one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information, and the set value is suggested according to the set value before and after the change of the set value. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, there has been a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability changing state that is a high-precision low-base state is repeated (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670).

  However, when an effect suggesting a setting as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is executed on a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670, there is room for improvement in the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting. Was. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 252F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player;
Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-6) that suggests the set value to the player,
The setting suggestion effect execution means repeats the setting based on the control to the advantageous state (for example, the jackpot D) repeatedly within a predetermined period (for example, within a period of 100 times of the high-accuracy low base after the end of the jackpot D). Suggestive effects can be performed.

  According to such a configuration, the setting suggestion effect is executed by being repeatedly controlled to the advantageous state within the predetermined period, so that it is possible to draw attention to the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting, and the interest of the game is improved. I do.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The predetermined period is a period after the advantageous state ends (for example, the predetermined period is a period of 100 high-accuracy low bases after the end of the big hit D).

  According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period starts after the advantageous state ends, the interest is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The setting suggestion effect is an effect performed at the end of the advantageous state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 21-6, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the big hit).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, big hit A) and a second advantageous state (for example, big hit D) which is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state,
The setting suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the setting suggestion effect based on being repeatedly controlled to the second advantageous state within the predetermined period (for example, 100 times of the high-accuracy low base after the end of the big hit D). The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the fact that the jackpot D has been repeatedly controlled during the period.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player when the disadvantageous advantageous state is repeated.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
The predetermined period is a period in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state, and the execution frequency of the variable display is controlled to the specific state (for example, the high-accuracy low base state) which is the same as the normal state. The specific state is repeated based on the control being repeatedly performed in the second advantageous state within the predetermined period (for example, the control is controlled to be the big hit D repeatedly in the period of 100 times of the high-accuracy low base after the end of the big hit D). The high-accuracy low-base state is repeated based on that).

  According to such a configuration, even if the specific state is repeated, the setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the player's disappointment can be further reduced.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The greater the number of times the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled, the higher the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7, the greater the number of times the jackpot is controlled, the higher the reliability A setting suggestion effect is determined using a high table).

  According to such a configuration, even if the second advantageous state is repeated, a highly-reliable setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the player's disappointment can be further reduced.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
Further comprising operating means (for example, a push button 31B) operable by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

  According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (7),
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value has been set (for example, CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 20-9, FIG. Step 112 IWS 108);
The setting suggestion effect execution means,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means (eg, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21-6),
When the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect execution unit sets a predetermined setting value having a low degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of setting values. (For example, if the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect as if it has been set to a low setting value). Is possible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an incorrect setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

(Description of the invention relating to the characteristic portion 253F)
As described above, the characteristic portion 253F includes the following invention relating to the above-described characteristic portion 253F. Conventionally, there is a pachinko gaming machine that can be set to one of a plurality of set values based on a setting change operation and that can execute control of an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on the set set value. Was. In such a pachinko game machine, any one of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion is displayed during the variable display of the identification information, and the set value is suggested according to the set value before and after the change of the set value. There was a gaming machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902). In addition, there has been a gaming machine in which a so-called latent probability changing state that is a high-precision low-base state is repeated (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670).

  However, when an effect suggesting a setting as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 is executed on a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-78670, there is room for improvement in the execution timing of the effect suggesting the setting. Was. In order to solve such a problem, the characteristic portion 253F is configured as follows.

(1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to a player,
Setting means (for example, a portion in which the CPU 103 executes a setting change process) which can be set to any one of a plurality of set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) having different degrees of advantage for the player;
Special state control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high probability state) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than a normal state after the end of the advantageous state;
Setting suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIG. 21-6) that suggests the set value to the player,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, big hit A) and a second advantageous state (for example, big hit D) which is more disadvantageous than the first advantageous state,
The rate at which the setting suggestion effect is executed differs between when the first advantageous state is controlled and when the second advantageous state is controlled (for example, in the case of the big hit A, the setting suggestion effect is not executed, but the big hit D Then a setting suggestion effect may be executed).

  According to such a configuration, since the execution ratio of the setting suggesting effect differs depending on the type of the advantageous state, attention can be paid to the execution timing of the effect indicating the setting, and the interest of the game is improved.

(2) In the gaming machine of the above (1),
The setting suggestion effect is an effect performed at the end of the advantageous state (for example, as illustrated in FIG. 21-6, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the ending period of the big hit).

  According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the end of the advantageous state, and the interest of the game is improved.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2),
The setting suggestion effect execution means can execute the setting suggestion effect based on being repeatedly controlled to the second advantageous state within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, after the end of the big hit D). The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the repetitive control of the jackpot D during the period of 100 times of the high-accuracy low base.)

  According to such a configuration, the player's disappointment when the disadvantageous second advantageous state is repeated can be reduced.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3),
The predetermined period is a period in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than that of the normal state, and the execution frequency of the variable display is controlled to the specific state (for example, the high-accuracy low base state) which is the same as the normal state. The specific state is repeated based on the control being repeatedly performed in the second advantageous state within the predetermined period (for example, the control is repeatedly performed to the big hit D during the 100 times of the high-accuracy low base after the big hit D ends). The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on that.)

  According to such a configuration, the player's disappointment when the disadvantageous second advantageous state is repeated can be reduced.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (4),
The greater the number of times the second advantageous state is repeatedly controlled, the higher the reliability of the setting suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 21-7, the greater the number of times the jackpot is controlled, the higher the reliability A setting suggestion effect is determined using a high table).

  According to such a configuration, even if the second advantageous state is repeated, a highly-reliable setting suggestion effect is executed, so that the player's disappointment can be further reduced.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
Further comprising operating means (for example, a push button 31B) operable by the player,
The setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the operation unit (for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B).

  According to such a configuration, the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6),
Setting value information output means capable of outputting setting value information capable of specifying which setting value has been set (for example, CPU103 of the game control microcomputer 100, step 112IWS031 in FIG. 20-9, FIG. Step 112 IWS 108);
The setting suggestion effect execution means,
The setting suggestion effect can be executed based on the setting value information output from the setting value information output means (eg, effect control CPU 120, setting suggestion effect of FIG. 21-6),
When the setting value information output from the setting value information output unit is not normal, the setting suggestion effect execution unit sets a predetermined setting value having a low degree of advantage to the player among the plurality of setting values. (For example, if the setting value command is not normal, the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion effect as if it has been set to a low setting value). Is possible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an incorrect setting value from being suggested to the player without reducing the number of times the setting suggestion effect is executed.

  The embodiments disclosed this time are to be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

1 Pachinko gaming machine, 2 gaming board, 3 gaming machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A winning ball device, 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker , 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning opening, 11 Main board, 12
Effect control board, 13 Voice control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 20 Normal symbol display, 21 Gate switch, 22A, 22B Starting port switch, 23 Count switch, 30 Hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B push Button, 32 movable body, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 random number circuit, 105, 125 I / O, 120 effect control CPU, 123 display control unit.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the advantageous state is controlled,
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
A gaming machine, wherein the title notifying means is capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.

Images